JP6665255B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine that projects an effect image of a game using a projector on a screen has been proposed. For example, Patent Literature 1 discloses a gaming machine that projects projection light from a projector on a flat screen arranged in the gaming machine.

JP-A-6-35066

  However, the effects in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 are limited to video effects projected on a screen fixed to a housing, and therefore have a lacking force.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a powerful effect.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(1) A gaming machine provided with a display unit (for example, a display unit 3A or the like) for displaying an image, wherein the display unit includes a projector (for example, a projector mechanism B2 or the like) for irradiating the image. The projector includes a screen device (for example, a screen device 2N or the like) to be projected by the projector, and a control unit (for example, a sub-control device SS or the like) for controlling the projector and the screen device. A material (for example, the second movable base 2N2 or the like), a three-dimensional member (for example, the second three-dimensional member R12 or the like) having an end fixed to the base and capable of being developed three-dimensionally, and the first base And a driving mechanism (for example, a driving device 2N5 or the like) for moving between the position and the second position, wherein the three-dimensional member is configured such that when the base material is arranged at the first position, Ri collapsed become housed state housed in the state, when said substrate is positioned in said second position is sterically development, Ri Do a deployed state in which the irradiation light can be irradiated from the projector The base material includes a first base material to which one end of the three-dimensional member is fixed (for example, the first movable base 2N1 or the like) and a second base material to which the other end of the three-dimensional member is fixed (for example, , A second movable substrate 2N2, etc.), wherein the drive mechanism is capable of independently moving the first substrate and the second substrate .

(2) The gaming machine according to (1),
An accommodating portion (e.g., accommodating recess 3 </ b> C <b> 3 a) capable of accommodating the substrate disposed at the first position;
In the housing state, the three-dimensional member is folded and housed between the base material and the housing unit,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a powerful effect.

It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a front view of a game machine. FIG. 3 is a schematic layout diagram inside a housing of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a positional relationship between a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where a mirror mechanism is attached. It is a longitudinal section of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of irradiation on a fixed screen mechanism. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of irradiation on a front screen mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an irradiation state on a rear screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side plate of the screen housing | casing. It is a perspective view of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation state of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a front view of a game machine when an upper door mechanism and a lower door mechanism are opened. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a positional relationship between a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where a mirror mechanism is attached. It is a longitudinal section of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a projector mechanism. It is a perspective view when a display unit is attached to a cabinet. FIG. 41 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view taken along the line ZZ in FIG. 40, omitting functional components housed in the housing of the display unit, and arranged above the gaming machine when the gaming machine is installed in the island facility. FIG. 3 also illustrates a fixed plate member of the island facility. It is a perspective view of a projector mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a perspective sectional view of a display unit and a cabinet. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of irradiation on a fixed screen mechanism. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of irradiation on a front screen mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of irradiation on a reel screen mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation range of a front screen mechanism and an operation range of a reel screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side plate of the screen housing | casing. It is a perspective view of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation state of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism and a front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of a reel screen mechanism, a reel screen drive mechanism, and a movable body base. It is a perspective view of a reel screen mechanism and a reel screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view for explaining a sensor mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a detection state of a sensor mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a detection state of a sensor mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a detection state of a sensor mechanism. FIG. 7 is a sequence diagram related to the operation of the front screen mechanism. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a control sequence of a drive motor of the front screen drive mechanism when driving the front screen mechanism from the front standby position to the front exposure position. It is a sequence diagram concerning operation of a reel screen mechanism. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a control sequence of a drive motor of the reel screen driving mechanism when driving the reel screen mechanism from a reel standby position to a reel exposure position. It is a figure explaining the drive procedure of a front screen mechanism and a reel screen mechanism concerning an origin return operation. It is a perspective view of a cabinet and a medal supply opening. It is a perspective view of a cabinet, a medal supply opening, and a medal supply mechanism. It is a perspective view of a medal supply mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a medal supply mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows arrangement | positioning of a back wall, a medal supply opening, a medal supply mechanism, and a scaler device. It is a front view of the game machine in the state where the lower door mechanism was opened. It is a perspective view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is a perspective view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is sectional drawing of the lower space of a cabinet. It is a front view, a top view, and a right side view of the coin guard. It is a front view of the game machine in the state where the lower door mechanism was opened. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a state where a hopper guide mechanism is attached to a bottom plate. It is the top view and front view of a hopper guide mechanism. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a hopper mechanism HP. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram when the hopper mechanism HP is normally mounted. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram when the hopper mechanism HP is normally mounted. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram when a hopper mechanism HP is erroneously entered. It is a detailed view of the inside of a cabinet. It is a perspective view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is explanatory drawing of a sheet metal. It is explanatory drawing of a sheet metal. It is a front view of the cabinet in the state where the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism were opened. It is a side view of the cabinet in the state where the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism were opened. It is a perspective view of the cabinet in the state where the lower drag mechanism was opened. It is explanatory drawing of an upper door lock mechanism. It is explanatory drawing of the upper door lock mechanism in a locked state. It is a perspective view of the game machine in the state where the lower door mechanism was removed from the cabinet. It is a perspective view of the game machine in the state where the lower door mechanism was opened. It is a detailed view of the lower space of the cabinet. It is a side view in the state where speaker DD25 and a power supply device were opposed. It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism. FIG. 4 is an exploded view of an operation unit and a locking unit of a maximum BET button. It is the figure which looked at the maximum BET button fixed to the 2nd pedestal part from the inside of a cabinet. It is sectional drawing of a 2nd pedestal part. FIG. 3 is an exploded view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a front view of the game machine in the state where the lower door mechanism was opened. It is a rear perspective view of a lower door mechanism. FIG. 3 is an exploded view of a lower door DD1, a reel unit RU, and a main control board MS. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of attaching a main control board to a reel unit. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view of mounting a reel unit to a lower door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a reel device. It is an exploded perspective view of a reel unit. It is a perspective view of a motor mounting plate, a reel index, and a sensor part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a detection piece and a detection state. It is a perspective view of a motor mounting plate and a sensor part. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a motor mounting plate and a sensor unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a motor mounting plate and a sensor unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment position of the pedestal member with respect to a motor attachment plate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment position of the sensor with respect to a pedestal member. FIG. 3 is a top view of the gaming machine with the upper door mechanism opened. It is a perspective view of the game machine in the state where the upper door mechanism was removed from the cabinet. It is explanatory drawing of an upper hinge mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between an irradiation light device and a decoration unit. It is sectional drawing of a decoration unit. It is a front view showing the internal configuration of the upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is a principal part expansion perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of an upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is a partial exploded perspective view of the left panel mechanism. It is sectional drawing of a left panel mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light-guide structure of a left light guide plate. It is a perspective view of a panel base, a top lens cover, and an upper left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of a top lens cover and an upper left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of a display unit concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a longitudinal section of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a screen mechanism. It is a longitudinal section of a display unit. It is a front view of the display unit concerning a modification. It is an exploded perspective view of a screen mechanism. It is a bottom view of a screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a screen mechanism. It is a front view of the display unit concerning a modification. It is a perspective view of a display unit concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a longitudinal section of a display unit. It is a bottom view of a display unit. It is a longitudinal section showing an operation process of a screen member. It is an explanatory view of an effect mode of a display unit. It is an explanatory view of an effect mode of a display unit. It is a longitudinal section explaining a modification of a drive mechanism. It is a longitudinal section explaining a modification of a drive mechanism. It is a longitudinal section explaining a modification of a drive mechanism. It is a sectional view of a game machine concerning a 5th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the mirror role was tilted. It is explanatory drawing of a mirror role. It is explanatory drawing of the operation | movement aspect which a mirror role rotates. It is an explanatory view of a production mode of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment. It is an explanatory view of a production mode of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment. It is an explanatory view of a production mode of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment. It is a schematic explanatory view of a gaming machine according to another embodiment. It is an explanatory view of a production mode of a gaming machine according to another embodiment.

(1st Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
The gaming machine is a so-called pachislot machine. A gaming machine is a gaming machine that uses a game medium such as a card storing information of a game value, which is given or given to a player, in addition to coins, medals, gaming balls or tokens, Hereinafter, description will be made assuming that medals are used.

  In the following description, the side (direction) from the gaming machine 1 toward the player is referred to as the front side (forward direction) of the gaming machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). The right and left sides of the gaming machine 1 are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the gaming machine 1, respectively. Further, a direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-rear direction or a thickness direction, and a direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. A direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as a vertical direction or a height direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the external appearance of the gaming machine 1 is configured by a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 includes a cabinet 21 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism UD arranged on the upper front side of the cabinet 21, and a lower door mechanism DD arranged on the lower front side of the cabinet 21. ing. The cabinet 21 houses equipment used for the game (for example, a reel (or also called a drum)). As shown in FIG. 3, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 21. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so that the upper and lower portions of the opening in the cabinet 21 can be closed. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 at the center. A transparent panel UD11 that transmits light is provided in the upper display window UD1.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 4, a display unit A is provided inside the cabinet 21 on the rear side of the upper door mechanism UD. As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit A is detachably provided on an intermediate support plate 211 in the cabinet 21. Note that the intermediate support plate 211 functions as a partition wall between the upper space and the lower space in the cabinet 21. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device that includes an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image, and a screen device C that causes the image to appear by being irradiated with the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. .

  Here, the projection mapping apparatus is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object. Etc.) and an image generated according to the effect information, which is generated based on the shape, enables an advanced and powerful effect.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation light device B includes a projector mechanism B2 that emits irradiation light forward, and a screen that is disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 and that receives irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 obliquely below and behind. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects light in the direction of the device C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 is arranged at a rear part in the cabinet 21. The projector mechanism B2 has a flat base member B22 arranged horizontally. On a lower surface of the base member B22, a lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided. The lens mechanism B21 is disposed so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

  Further, on the lower surface of the base member B22, heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided. The heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 are disposed on the right and left sides of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The heat exhausting mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct through which air flows and a fan that sends out air. By blowing air backward, heat generated when generating irradiation light is forcibly moved backward. It is designed to flow. As shown in FIG. 2, ventilation holes 21 a of the cabinet 21 are arranged in the direction of air flow in the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24. Thus, the heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly discharge the heat of the projector mechanism B2 to the outside of the apparatus together with the air through the ventilation holes 21a.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 6, a mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 (in the emission direction of irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 has a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. are doing. As shown in FIG. 8, the mirror holder B31 is formed in a rectangular plate shape on the front surface. At each corner of the mirror holder B31, an angle adjustment hole B311 is formed, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface around the angle adjustment hole B311. Mounting holes B314 are formed symmetrically in the vertical direction between the angle adjustment holes B311 in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed at the center and has a size that does not overlap with the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and the mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

  The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed so as to partially overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with both left and right sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted to the mirror holding portion B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344. The optical mirror B32 is held by a mirror holder B31.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed at the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1, and is arranged to be exposed to the front when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjustment hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

  A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holder B11, and this screw passes through the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws that pass through the angle adjustment holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are the same as those of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341.

  Then, when the screw is rotated in a direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 increases. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in a direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is reduced.

  As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344, whereby the optical mirror is provided between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is pinched. As described above, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33, B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33, B34 is changed by rotating the screw. Thus, the distance between the reflector holding unit B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corners of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism at the positions where the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from B3, the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 can be finely adjusted.

  Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the concave portion B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11. It is pinched by. Then, a screw inserted from the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 passes through the spring. Thus, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases with the rotation of the screw, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 due to the urging force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from jumping out of the angle adjustment hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 10, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are housed in the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 includes an upper wall portion B12 disposed horizontally, a reflector holding portion B11 disposed in front of the upper wall portion B12, and side wall portions B13 and B13 disposed symmetrically in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. And The upper wall portion B12 has a front portion projecting forward from the cabinet 21 of FIG. A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in a central portion of a front side of the upper wall portion B12 so as to protrude forward, and holds the above-described mirror mechanism B3 in a space formed by the projection so as to be adjustable in angle. .

  Further, the side wall portions B13 and B13 have a protruding portion B131 protruding horizontally from the lower end portion. The protrusion B131 has a first protrusion B131a on the front side and a second protrusion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet 21 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 21, and is set to have a width slightly smaller than the width of the opening of the cabinet 21. Have been. On the other hand, the second protrusion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to a space behind the opening of the cabinet 21 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 21, and is larger than the width of the space behind. It is set to a slightly smaller width. That is, in each of the side wall portions B13, the width of the second protruding portion B131b is wider than the width of the first protruding portion B131a. Thus, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space in the cabinet 21.

  On the lower surface side of the projector cover B1, a perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided. The perforated plate B15 is a punched metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by punching a metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.) plate. The plurality of holes B151 are formed substantially uniformly dispersed over the entire surface of the perforated plate B15. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow through the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and allows air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and number of the holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be seen from outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, and a hexagon, and has a hole diameter of about 3 to 5 mm.

  The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protrusion B131a and the second protrusion B131b of the projector cover B1 from a lower position. As shown in FIG. 12, the perforated plate B15 has an upper portion B15a on the front side, an inclined portion B15b on the middle portion, and a lower portion B15c on the rear side. The upper part B15a is arranged horizontally. The inclined portion B15b is formed by bending obliquely downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower portion B15c is formed by being bent horizontally from the rear side of the inclined portion B15b.

  The upper part B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side walls B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so as to cover the front part of the projector cover B1 from below with the upper part B15a, and to cover from the lower part with the inclined part B15b and the lower part B15c from the middle part to the rear part of the projector cover B1. I have. As shown in FIG. 10, a front screen mechanism E1 of the screen device C is disposed below the perforated plate B15.

  As will be described in detail later, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a front standby position disposed at an upper position serving as a standby posture for inhibiting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light, and a lower position serving as an exposure posture for permitting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture has an inclined posture substantially parallel to and close to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed position, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and air existing in this space portion reaches the perforated plate B15 without flow resistance, and a plurality of spaces are formed. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the flow of air into the screen device C and increase the cooling efficiency.

  The perforated plate B15 is provided so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 13, the line of sight of the player located on the front side is centered in the vertical and horizontal directions of the screen device C. The perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation light device B from being viewed even when the light irradiation device B exists on the horizontal line of the portion and looks up at the irradiation light device B from this line-of-sight position.

(Display unit A: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 14, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screwing. Thus, the display unit A can handle the irradiation light device B and the screen device C integrally as a unit.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10)
The screen device C has a box-shaped screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 15, the screen housing C10 includes a bottom plate C1 disposed horizontally, a right plate C2 erected on the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left plate C3 erected on the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. Thereby, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screw fastening, so that the front side where the player is located and the top side where the irradiation light device B is located. An open box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

  The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4, which constitute the screen housing C10, are each independently formed in a predetermined shape, and predetermined functional parts such as a fixed screen mechanism D can be attached. Has been. This makes it possible to share the plate unit of the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4, even if the entire unit of the screen device C cannot be shared. In addition, since it is possible to partially change each plate member, it is possible to easily change specifications for each model of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Bottom plate C1)
Specifically, the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape when viewed from above. On the upper surface of the bottom plate C1, a central mounting portion C11 arranged at the center portion, and a right mounting portion C12 and a left mounting portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction around the central mounting portion C11 are provided. I have. These mounting portions C11, C12, and C13 are formed in a concave shape. The center mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D so as to be positioned by fitting the lower end of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right mounting part C12 and the left mounting part C13 position the right mobile body base C5 and the left mobile body base C6 by fitting the lower ends of the right mobile body base C5 and the left mobile body base C6, respectively. Mounted as possible.

  Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the front end portion is located below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side portion C14. As shown in FIG. 5, when the display unit A is mounted while being mounted on the intermediate support plate 211 of the cabinet 21, the front side portion C <b> 14 abuts on the front surface of the intermediate support plate 211 so that the front unit C <b> 14 It is possible to perform rearward positioning. Then, the display unit A is screwed to the front surface of the cabinet 21 through the through hole C141 of the front side portion C14, so that the display unit A can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet 21. It is possible.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Right side plate C2, Left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit A can be carried by hooking the hands on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the sides of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal direction is aligned in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set so that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from outside.

  Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet 21, first, the display unit A is taken out from the front side of the cabinet 21 in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened. . Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet 21 releases the screws of the display unit A to the cabinet 21 and removes the screws. Then, the user reaches the inside of the cabinet 21 and holds the operation openings C21 and C31 of the display unit A with both hands, and takes out the display unit A out of the cabinet 21. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17, for example, the user reaches into the screen device C from one of the operation openings C21 of the detached display unit A, and rotates the crank gear E21 that is viewed horizontally from the operation opening C21. Thus, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by moving from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

  In a state where the upper door mechanism UD is opened, a hand is reached from the front of the opening of the cabinet 21 into a space between the side wall 212 of the cabinet 21 and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and the operation opening C21 is opened. By operating the crank gear E21 from above, the crank gear E21 can be rotated. In this case, the locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released without removing the display unit A outside the cabinet 21.

  Further, a motor accommodating portion C22 is formed in the right side plate C2. The motor housing C22 houses the drive motor F21 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 18, the back plate C4 of the screen casing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and the relay board CK is provided on the back surface. The relay board CK allows a plurality of signal lines in the display unit A to be assembled and wiring to the outside of the display unit A to be performed at one place. The relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4 so as to be disposed in front of the back wall 213 of the cabinet 21. That is, the relay board CK is disposed in a gap between the back wall 213 of the cabinet 21 and the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 5, a through hole 2111 of the intermediate support plate 211 that supports the display unit A is arranged below the relay board CK, and the signal line of the relay board CK is inserted therethrough.

  Accordingly, since the relay board is arranged outside the screen device C, the wiring work is facilitated, and it is not necessary to secure an installation space for the relay board CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom of design in the device C is increased.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 18, an operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged on the lower right side, and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet 21, the display unit A is first removed from the cabinet 21. Thereafter, the user reaches the inside of the screen device C through the operation opening C41 and rotates the intermediate gear E23 that is viewed in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, thereby easily moving the locked front screen mechanism E1 from the standby position. Can be moved.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The detailed structure of each screen mechanism D / E1 / F1 will be described later.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen position relation)
As shown in FIG. 19, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 20, the front screen mechanism E1 is provided rotatably between a front exposure position and a front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set such that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and is located ahead of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 hides the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the front screen mechanism E1. Making it possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, by exposing the fixed screen mechanism D, an image based on the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatably provided between a reel exposure position and a reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set such that the reel exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and is located ahead of the fixed exposure position. Thereby, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposure position, the image by the irradiation light appears only on the reel screen mechanism F1 by setting the reel screen mechanism F1 to cover the fixed screen mechanism D from the front. Making it possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, by exposing the fixed screen mechanism D, it is possible to make the image by the irradiation light appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 located at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 located at the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is located above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is located behind the fixed screen mechanism D. Thereby, the rotation distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is shorter than the rotation distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 are different between the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 so that the overlapping of the operation areas due to the rotation is minimized. ing. Specifically, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is set above the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. Thereby, the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is set to a minimum.

  The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on condition that at least one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is at the standby position. This prevents interference between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 when rotating.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflector D1, a right reflector D2, a left reflector D3, and a lower reflector D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting portions D1 to D4 are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B.

  Note that the fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflecting portions as long as it has a reflecting surface at a plurality of different angles with respect to the optical axis of irradiation light, Alternatively, a reflecting portion having a curved or arcuate reflecting surface whose center of curvature is located on the front surface side and continuously has different angles with respect to the optical axis may be provided.

  The front reflection portion D1 has a reflection surface facing the player on the front side and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B disposed in the upper front part of the fixed screen mechanism D forward. Is set to The right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 are joined to the right and left sides of the front-side reflection unit D1, and are arranged symmetrically about the front-side reflection unit D1. The right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the front reflection unit D1. Thereby, the right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 can easily reflect a part of the irradiation light while causing an image by the irradiation light to appear, because the reflection direction of the irradiation light on the reflection surface is easily directed toward the front reflection unit D1. The light is reflected in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. Also, with respect to the lower surface reflection portion D4, since the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface is more likely to be directed to the front reflection portion D1, a part of the irradiation light is caused to appear in the direction of the front reflection portion D1 while an image by the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

  In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the reflection surface is set lower than the brightness of each reflection surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected from the reflection surface of the irradiation light is smaller than the amount of light reflected from the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Thereby, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the white blur due to the mixing of light due to the irregular reflection of the reflection units D1 to D4 is prevented. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, it is possible to reduce the reflection of the irradiation light to the front reflection unit D1 in the other reflection units D2, D3, and D4, so that it is possible to reduce the white blur while making the image appear strongly in the front reflection unit D1.

As the lightness, Brightness in the L ^* a ^* b ^* color system (L ^* a ^* b ^* color space) or the L ^* u ^* v ^* color system (L ^* u ^* v ^* color space) is adopted. However, any other color can be defined as long as other colors can be represented by relative values based on white.

  The brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the brightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the same as the brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. There is no particular limitation as long as the brightness is lower than the surface brightness. For example, the brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) lower than the brightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In order to make the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the lightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. What is necessary is just to make black the color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. For example, a white paint is used as the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the paint of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. What added a black pigment to the paint applied to a substrate should just be used.

  In such a paint, the brightness of the reflection surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio between the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 includes only the white pigment among the white pigment and the black pigment, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes: Both a white pigment and a black pigment may be included. Further, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment is higher in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D than the paint applied to the base materials of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 (for example, 5 to 25% (or (About 10 to 20%)). In addition, as a coating material applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, a conventionally known coating material for a screen can be appropriately used, and can be adjusted according to a screen type (for example, a diffusion type or a reflection type). .

  It is to be noted that the black pigment is not contained in the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, but the black pigment is dispersed in the resin used as the material of the base material before the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is formed. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored and the brightness of the base material itself may be reduced.

  Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, the members constituting the screen housing C10, such as the surrounding walls (the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4), and the inside of the screen housing C10. It is desirable to lower the brightness of other members (members other than the screen) arranged in the. It is desirable that the brightness of those members is lower than the brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, as for the surrounding wall, it is not necessary to consider that an image is projected as a screen, so if the brightness is low, Lower is more desirable. That is, the color of the surrounding wall is preferably as close to black as possible.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 22, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both surfaces. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin flat panel. Thus, the front screen member E11 is configured such that the projection surface E11a is formed in a flat shape, so that an image having no distortion appears when the irradiation light is irradiated.

  On the other hand, the front screen support E12 has a holding recess E121 that holds the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to the projection screen E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding concave portion E121 is set to have two depths, a deep portion and a shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral portion of the front screen support base E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly across both ends in the short direction passing through the center portion.

  As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 abuts and is supported by the step E121a of the peripheral portion and the linear step E121b passing through the center, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. Have been in a state. As a result, the deformation of the front screen support E12 in the deep portion prevents the front screen member E11 from deforming and causing distortion on the projection surface E11a.

  The front screen support E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a partial area around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is made visible to a player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposure position. Further, the front screen support base E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is made visible to a player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position. On the first pattern surface E12a and the second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to a game effect is formed three-dimensionally by unevenness.

  The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are separately formed and then integrated by bonding with an adhesive. As a result, even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern or the like on the front screen support E12, the sink marks are mechanically separated from the front screen member E11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent distortion due to sinking of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11.

  The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to bonding with an adhesive, but may be any method such as screw fastening.

  The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As a material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, an ABS resin or the like) capable of generating sink marks when injection molding is performed may be appropriately employed. it can.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen driving mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the front screen driving mechanism E2 includes a left front screen driving mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end of the front screen mechanism E1, and a right screen connected to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. And a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The crank member E22 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has an upper end (one end) connected to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. As shown in FIG. 25, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 in FIG. 15 at an intermediate position E22a. This allows the crank member E22 to rotate at the upper end and the lower end (the other end) about the intermediate position E22a as the center of rotation.

  The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a, and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as shown in FIG. 25, the center line in the upper region (a straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the middle point on the upper end side of the crank member E22) is vertically oriented in the standby posture. Is set to On the other hand, the center line (the straight line passing through the middle position E22a and the middle point at the lower end side of the crank member E22) in the lower region is set so that the lower side is inclined more forward than the upper side in the standby posture.

  A slide groove E22b is formed in a lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed such that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. The two linear portions are formed in parallel, and the slide groove E22b has a surface corresponding to the linear portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 set in parallel with the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (the distance between the two linear portions) substantially matches the member width of the slide member E26, and is set so as to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. The upper end of the slide groove E22b is set such that the slide member E26 abuts on the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture. On the other hand, the lower end of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

  The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at an eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 in FIG. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is a line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposure position. It is set so as to have a relationship orthogonal to a line connecting the center point of E26.

  Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, even if a force acts in a direction for rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the rotation center position is determined in a direction in which all components of the force are applied. Since E21a exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-joint link having zero degrees of freedom with the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends and the slide member E26 as a free end. Even when the mechanism E1 is pressed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as strong brakes.

  An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. A motor shaft gear E24 meshes with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. Thus, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

  Here, all components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. Also, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 28, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, a line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b corresponds to the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22. Since the rotation trajectory is set so as to be orthogonal to the line connecting the center point of the slide member E26, the tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22. Accordingly, when the rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26. Therefore, the crank gear E21 starts rotating easily.

  When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b. The intermediate position E22a and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and a two-joint link having one degree of freedom is formed in which the slide member E26 is a free end movable along the groove wall surface. When the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 provided with the slide groove E22b in which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates around the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum, thereby rotating the upper region of the crank member E22. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

  In addition, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is in the stop state 0 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, gradually increases, and is intermediate between the standby posture and the exposure posture (FIG. 27). , Gradually decelerates after reaching the maximum speed, and enters the stop state 0 when the exposure posture and the standby posture are attained. Accordingly, the rotation can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration of the crank gear E21 is small (moment of inertia), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the driving mechanism ( It is possible to reduce failure and wear due to overload of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25).

  As shown in FIG. 15, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The crank gear E21 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the crank gear E21 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3 so that the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is evenly applied. I have.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the reel screen mechanism F1 includes a reel screen portion F11 formed of a curved flat plate, a left reel screen support portion F12 connected to the left end of the reel screen portion F11, and a reel screen portion F11. And a right reel screen support portion F13 connected to the right end of the screen.

  The reel screen portion F11 is curved in a shape approximate to the rotation direction, and a pattern is formed on the back surface that is the rotation center side. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position, the pattern on the back surface is made visible to the player in front. On the surface of the reel screen portion F11, a pattern is formed on a peripheral portion, and an inner peripheral region of the peripheral portion is a projection surface. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, the projection surface can make an image appear by irradiation of irradiation light.

  One ends of the left and right reel screen support portions F12 and F13 are connected to the reel screen portion F11. On the other hand, the other end portions of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13 each have a projection (not shown). The protruding portion protrudes horizontally outside each of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13, and is connected to the reel screen drive mechanism F2 to be a rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1.

(2nd Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
The gaming machine is a so-called pachislot machine. A gaming machine is a gaming machine that uses a game medium such as a card storing information of a game value, which is given or given to a player, in addition to coins, medals, gaming balls or tokens, Hereinafter, description will be made assuming that medals are used.

  In the following description, the side (direction) from the gaming machine 1 toward the player is referred to as the front side (forward direction) of the gaming machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). The right and left sides of the gaming machine 1 are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the gaming machine 1, respectively. Further, a direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-rear direction or a thickness direction, and a direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. A direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as a vertical direction or a height direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the external appearance of the gaming machine 1 is constituted by a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism UD arranged on an upper front part of the cabinet G, and a lower door mechanism DD arranged on a lower front part of the cabinet G. have.

  Further, two openings G41 penetrating in the up-down direction are formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. A wooden plate member G42 is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G41.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so that the upper part and the lower part of the opening in the cabinet G can be closed. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 at the center. A transparent panel UD11 that transmits light is provided in the upper display window UD1.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the inside of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that partitions the inside of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the display unit A and the like. Further, the lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and a sub-control for controlling the reel unit RU, the main control board MS for controlling the entire operation of the gaming machine 1, and the display unit A. The device SS (see FIGS. 89 and 90) is accommodated.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 33, the display unit A is exchangeably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device that includes an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image, and a screen device C that causes the image to appear by being irradiated with the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. .

  Here, the projection mapping apparatus is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object. Etc.) and an image generated according to the effect information, which is generated based on the shape, enables an advanced and powerful effect.

  The display unit A has a housing A1 having an opening formed in the front. The housing A1 includes a projector cover B1 of the irradiation light device B and a screen housing C10 of the screen device C. As will be described in detail later, the screen housing C10 has a box shape having a bottom plate C1, a right plate C2, a left plate C3, and a back plate C4. Then, the projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the upper surface of the screen housing C10.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B)
As shown in FIG. 34, the irradiation light device B includes a projector mechanism B2 that emits irradiation light forward, and a screen that is disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 and that receives irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 diagonally below and behind. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects light in the direction of the device C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 is disposed at a rear part in the cabinet G. The projector mechanism B2 has a flat base member B22 arranged horizontally. On a lower surface of the base member B22, a lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided. The lens mechanism B21 is disposed so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

  Further, on the lower surface of the base member B22, heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided. The heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 are disposed on the right and left sides of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The heat exhausting mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct through which air flows and a fan that sends out air. By blowing air backward, heat generated when generating irradiation light is forcibly moved backward. It is designed to flow. As shown in FIG. 30, the ventilation holes G3a of the cabinet G are arranged in the flow direction of the air in the heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24. Thus, the heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly discharge the heat of the projector mechanism B2 to the outside of the apparatus together with the air through the ventilation holes G3a.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 34, a mirror mechanism B3 is disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 (in the emission direction of irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 35, the mirror mechanism B3 has a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. are doing. As also shown in FIG. 36, the front surface of the mirror holder B31 is formed in a rectangular plate shape. At each corner of the mirror holder B31, an angle adjustment hole B311 is formed, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface around the angle adjustment hole B311. Mounting holes B314 are formed symmetrically in the vertical direction between the angle adjustment holes B311 in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed at the center and has a size that does not overlap with the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and the mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

  The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed so as to partially overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with both left and right sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted to the mirror holding portion B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344. The optical mirror B32 is held by a mirror holder B31.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed at the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1, and is arranged to be exposed to the front when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjustment hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

  A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holder B11, and this screw passes through the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws that pass through the angle adjustment holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are the same as those of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341.

  Then, when the screw is rotated in a direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 increases. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in a direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is reduced.

  As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344, whereby the optical mirror is provided between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is pinched. As described above, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33, B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33, B34 is changed by rotating the screw. Thus, the distance between the reflector holding unit B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corners of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism at the positions where the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from B3, the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 can be finely adjusted.

  Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the concave portion B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11. It is pinched by. Then, a screw inserted from the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 passes through the spring. Thus, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases with the rotation of the screw, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 due to the urging force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from jumping out of the angle adjustment hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 38, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are housed in the projector cover B1. In addition, the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2 has an inclined surface B2a1 that is inclined upward from the rear toward the front at the front. As shown in FIG. 39, the projector cover B1 has an upper wall portion B12 disposed horizontally, a reflector holding portion B11 disposed in front of the upper wall portion B12, and a left-right symmetric arrangement in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. Side walls B13. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 projects forward from the cabinet G (see FIG. 33). A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in a central portion of a front portion of the upper wall portion B12 so as to protrude forward, and the above-described mirror mechanism B3 is held in a space formed by the projection so as to be adjustable in angle. I have.

  Further, the side wall portions B13, B13 have a protruding portion B131 protruding from the lower end portion in the left-right horizontal direction. The protrusion B131 has a first protrusion B131a on the front side and a second protrusion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet G. The distance in the left-right direction between the tips of the first protruding portions B131a protruding from the side walls B13 is set to be slightly shorter than the width in the left-right direction of the opening of the cabinet G. On the other hand, the second projecting portion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to a space behind the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet G. The distance in the left-right direction between the distal ends of the second protrusions B131b protruding from the side walls B13 is set to a distance slightly shorter than the width in the left-right direction of the space behind the cabinet G. That is, the side walls B13 are formed such that the distance in the left-right direction between the tips of the second protrusions B131b is greater than the distance in the left-right direction between the tips of the first protrusions B131a. Thereby, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space in the cabinet G.

  In addition, a screw hole B131C penetrating in the up-down direction is formed at the tip of the second protrusion B131b. When fixing the projector cover B1 to the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 (see FIG. 33), screws are screwed into the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 through the screw holes B131C. In addition, the protrusions B131 project in the horizontal direction from the lower ends of the side walls B13, B13, so that the protrusions B131 and the side walls B13 have recesses at both ends of the projector cover B1 from the front ends thereof. B132 is formed continuously toward the rear.

  As shown in FIG. 40, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, a space BS is defined by the recess B132 and the cabinet G. The shape of the upper wall portion B12 and the side wall portion B13 of the projector cover B1 is such that the distance between the lower end portion of each side wall portion B13 and the distal end portion of the second protruding portion B131b protruding from the lower end portion is the same. The front part of the two protruding parts B131b is configured to be larger than the rear part (see FIG. 39). As a result, the front space of the space BS becomes larger than the rear space. Further, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, at least a part of the opening G41 formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G and the space in front of the space BS overlap when viewed from above. This space BS is used as a work space for installing and fixing the gaming machine 1 on the island facilities.

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the gaming machine is installed and fixed on the island facility, a fixing plate member OC of the island facility is arranged above the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G. The space BS is a space in which nails from the plate member G42 attached to the upper surface wall G4 to the fixed plate member OC of the island facility can be driven from inside the cabinet G.

  As described above, even when the display unit A is housed in the cabinet G with almost no gap between the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 and the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G, the display unit A A space BS for securing the installation to the island facility is secured between the cabinet BS and the cabinet G. This allows the operator to perform a nailing operation using the space BS from the front side of the cabinet G where the upper door mechanism UD is opened, and as a result, the display unit A is damaged. The gaming machine 1 can be nailed to the fixed plate member OC of the island facility while the display unit A is housed in the cabinet G while preventing it.

  Further, the nail for nailing the gaming machine 1 and the fixed plate member OC is driven not into the metal cabinet G but into a wooden plate member G42 which is softer than the cabinet. Can be installed on island facilities.

  As a modified example, the material of the plate member G42 is not limited to wood, and various materials can be adopted as long as the material is a soft member softer than the cabinet G. Further, the method of fixing the gaming machine 1 to the island equipment is not limited to nailing, and various fixing methods such as screwing can be adopted.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: perforated plate B15)
As shown in FIG. 42, a perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by punching a plate made of a metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, or the like). The plurality of holes B151 are formed substantially uniformly distributed over the entire surface of the perforated plate B15. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow through the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and allows air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and number of the holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be seen from outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and has a hole diameter of about 3 to 5 mm.

  The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protrusion B131a and the second protrusion B131b of the projector cover B1 from a lower position. The perforated plate B15 has an upper portion B15a on the front side, an inclined portion B15b on the middle portion, and a lower portion B15c on the rear side. The upper part B15a is arranged horizontally. The inclined portion B15b is formed by bending obliquely downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower portion B15c is formed by being bent horizontally from the rear side of the inclined portion B15b.

  The upper part B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side walls B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so as to cover the front part of the projector cover B1 from below with the upper part B15a, and to cover from the lower part with the inclined part B15b and the lower part B15c from the middle part to the rear part of the projector cover B1. I have. The inclined portion B15b is disposed so as to surround the inclined surface B2a1 on the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2 when viewed from above. Then, as shown in FIG. 38, the inclination angle of the inclined portion B15b (the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane) is substantially the same as the inclination angle of the inclined surface B2a1. Below the perforated plate B15, a front screen mechanism E1 of the screen device C is disposed.

  As will be described in detail later, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a front standby position disposed at an upper position serving as a standby posture for inhibiting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light, and a lower position serving as an exposure posture for permitting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture has an inclined posture substantially parallel to and close to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed position, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and air existing in this space portion reaches the perforated plate B15 without flow resistance, and a plurality of spaces are formed. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the flow of air into the screen device C and increase the cooling efficiency.

  The perforated plate B15 is provided so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 43, the line-of-sight position of the player located on the front side is centered in the vertical and horizontal directions of the screen device C. The perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation light device B from being viewed even when the light irradiation device B exists on the horizontal line of the portion and looks up at the irradiation light device B from this line-of-sight position.

(Display unit A: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 44, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screwing. For example, as described above, a screw is screwed into the upper surface of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C via the screw hole B131C formed in the protruding portion B131 of the projector cover B1. Thus, the display unit A can handle the irradiation light device B and the screen device C integrally as a unit.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The projection surfaces of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have different shapes to diversify the image expression. The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens, and are driven by the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2, respectively. The front screen mechanism E1 is larger and heavier than the reel screen mechanism F1. Therefore, driving the front screen mechanism E1 requires a larger driving force than driving the reel screen mechanism F1. The detailed structure of each screen mechanism D • E1 • F1 and each screen drive mechanism E2 • F2 will be described later.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10)
The screen device C has the box-shaped screen housing C10 as described above. As shown in FIG. 45, the screen casing C10 includes a bottom plate C1 disposed horizontally, a right plate C2 standing upright on the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left plate C3 standing upright on the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. Thereby, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screw fastening, so that the front side where the player is located and the top side where the irradiation light device B is located. An open box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

  The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 constituting the screen casing C10 are separately molded into a predetermined shape, and predetermined functional parts such as the fixed screen mechanism D can be positioned and arranged. Has been. This makes it possible to share the plate unit of the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4, even if the entire unit of the screen device C cannot be shared. In addition, since it is possible to partially replace each plate member, it is possible to easily change specifications for each model of the gaming machine 1. The functional components positioned and arranged with respect to each plate member will be described later in detail.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Bottom plate C1)
The bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape when viewed from above. On the upper surface of the bottom plate C1, a central mounting portion C11 arranged at the center portion, and a right mounting portion C12 and a left mounting portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction around the central mounting portion C11 are provided. I have. These mounting portions C11, C12, and C13 are formed in a concave shape. The center mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D so as to be positioned by fitting the lower end of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right mounting portion C12 mounts the right movable body base C5 in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the right movable body base C5. The left mounting portion C13 mounts the left movable body base C6 in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end of the left movable body base C6. The right and left movable bases C5 and C6 each have a three-dimensional pattern formed on the inner side in the left-right direction by unevenness. That is, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 also function as decorative members. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable base C5, and the left movable base C6 can be positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

  Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the front end portion is located below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side portion C14. When the display unit A is mounted while being mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 33) of the cabinet G, the front side portion C14 comes into contact with the front surface of the intermediate support plate G1 to move backward in the cabinet G. It is possible to perform positioning. The display unit A is screwed to the front surface of the cabinet G via the through hole C141 of the front side C14, so that the display unit A can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet G. It is possible.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Right side plate C2, Left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit A can be carried by hooking the hands on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the sides of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal direction is aligned in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set so that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from outside.

  Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G, first, the display unit A is taken out from the front side of the cabinet G in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened. . Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet G releases the screws of the display unit A to the cabinet G and removes the screws. Then, the user reaches into the cabinet G, grasps the operation openings C21 and C31 of the display unit A with both hands, and takes out the display unit A out of the cabinet G. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47, for example, the user reaches into the screen device C from one of the operation openings C21 of the detached display unit A, and rotates the crank gear E21 that is viewed horizontally from the operation opening C21. Thus, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by moving from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

  In a state where the upper door mechanism UD is opened, a hand is reached from the front of the opening of the cabinet G into the space between the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and the operation opening C21 is opened. By operating the crank gear E21 from above, the crank gear E21 can be rotated. In this case, the locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released without removing the display unit A out of the cabinet G.

  Further, a motor accommodating portion C22 is formed in the right side plate C2. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is positioned and arranged by the motor housing portion C22. Further, a first support portion C23 for rotatably supporting a gear shaft E21a of a crank gear E21 in the front screen driving mechanism E2, and an intermediate gear E23 in the front screen driving mechanism E2 are respectively provided on the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. A second support portion C24 for rotatably supporting the shaft member E3 serving as the gear shaft of the first embodiment is formed. As described above, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are positioned and arranged by the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The right front screen drive mechanism E2B of the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are disposed between the right movable base C5 and the right plate C2 in the left-right direction. Further, the left front screen drive mechanism E2A is disposed between the left movable body base C6 and the left side plate C3 in the left-right direction.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 48, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a concave portion CO for positioning and positioning the relay board CK is formed in a lower portion of the back surface thereof. The relay board CK is a relay for relaying wiring (not shown) between various functional components (such as the projector mechanism B2) of the display unit A and various functional components other than the display unit A (such as the sub-control device SS). It is a substrate.

  An operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged on the lower right side, and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G, the display unit A is first removed from the cabinet G. Thereafter, the user reaches the inside of the screen device C through the operation opening C41 and rotates the intermediate gear E23 that is viewed in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, thereby easily moving the locked front screen mechanism E1 from the standby position. Can be moved.

  Further, the back plate C4 is disposed forward of the rear end of each of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 49, when the display unit A is mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 of the cabinet G, the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3 of the screen device C, and The space GS is defined by the back plate C4. That is, a gap is secured between the back wall G3 and the back plate C4. Thereby, even if the relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4, it is possible to prevent the relay board CK from interfering with the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G due to the space GS.

  Further, a through hole G11 is formed at a position facing the space GS in the intermediate support plate G1. The through-hole G11 is formed such that its opening surrounds the relay board CK in a top view. In addition, the relay board CK is arranged so that the connector CK1 to which a wiring from a device (such as the sub-control device SS) housed in the lower space of the cabinet G is connected faces the through hole G11. Thereby, the electrical connection between the relay board CK of the display unit A and the device accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G is achieved by inserting the wiring from the device accommodated in the lower space into the through-hole G11. This can be performed by connecting to CK1.

  Since the relay board CK is arranged outside the screen device C in this manner, the wiring work is facilitated, and it is not necessary to secure an installation space for the relay board CK in the screen device C, The degree of freedom of design in the screen device C is expanded. Further, it becomes easy to discharge the heat generated from the relay board CK to the outside through the ventilation holes G3a formed in the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G.

  Further, the wiring connecting the relay board CK arranged in the upper space of the cabinet G and the device accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G passes through the through hole G11 formed in the rear part of the intermediate support plate G1. Therefore, it is easy to arrange wiring behind various devices in the cabinet G. As a result, the degree of freedom of wiring can be increased.

  In addition, since the relay board CK is disposed at the rear part in the cabinet G, light hardly reaches the relay board CK, and as a result, it is difficult to connect wiring to the connector CK1 of the relay board CK. It is possible that Therefore, in order to facilitate the connection of the wiring from the device accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G to the relay board CK, the connector CK1 of the relay board CK passes below the intermediate support plate G1 through the through hole G11. It may be constituted so that it may project. Further, the color of the connector CK1 may be a color having a high light reflectance (for example, white).

  As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 are positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is positioned and arranged on the right side plate C2, and the gear shaft E21a and the shaft member E3 of the front screen drive mechanism E2 are positioned and arranged on the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The relay board CK is positioned and arranged with respect to the back plate C4. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the driving mechanisms F2 and E2, and the relay board CK are respectively positioned and arranged on one of the bottom plate C1, the side plates C2 and C3, and the back plate C4, and are different from each other. It is positioned and arranged on the plate. Therefore, even if the entire display unit A cannot be shared between the models, the display unit A can be shared between the models on a board basis. As a result, it is possible to manufacture the display unit at lower cost than in the case where the display unit is manufactured for each model.

  Further, since the plates C1 to C4 of the screen housing C10 are connected by screw fastening, the connection between the plates C1 to C4 can be released by loosening the screws. That is, the screen housing C10 is assembled such that the respective plates C1 to C4 are exchangeable. This makes it possible to replace the functional components of the display unit on a board-by-board basis, thereby making it possible to change the specifications of the display unit A while reusing functional components that are not to be replaced by the display unit A. .

  As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the right movable body base C5 is disposed on the left inner side of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2. Further, the left movable body base C6 is disposed on the right inside of the left front screen driving mechanism E2A. As a result, the right movable base C5 and the left movable base C6, which are decorative members, make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the drive mechanisms E2 and F2. As a result, the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the bottom plate C1 is formed with a concave portion for arranging the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, these can be easily positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen position relation)
As shown in FIG. 50, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 51, the front screen mechanism E1 is provided rotatably between a front exposure position and a front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set such that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and is located ahead of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 hides the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the front screen mechanism E1. Making it possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, by exposing the fixed screen mechanism D, an image based on the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 becomes a projection target of the projector mechanism B2. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes a projection target of the projector mechanism B2.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the reel screen mechanism F1 is provided rotatably between a reel exposure position and a reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set such that the reel exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and is located ahead of the fixed exposure position. Thereby, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposure position, the image by the irradiation light appears only on the reel screen mechanism F1 by setting the reel screen mechanism F1 to cover the fixed screen mechanism D from the front. Making it possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, by exposing the fixed screen mechanism D, it is possible to make the image by the irradiation light appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 becomes a projection target of the projector mechanism B2. On the other hand, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes a projection target of the projector mechanism B2.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the axial direction of the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 and the axial direction of the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1 coincide with the left-right direction. The operation ranges of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 due to the rotation partially overlap each other. Therefore, when one of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed in the overlapping range where the operation range overlaps, the other screen is brought into contact when the other screen is rotated.

  The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 located at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 located at the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is located above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is located behind the fixed screen mechanism D. Thereby, the rotation distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is shorter than the rotation distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The front standby position is located outside the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and the reel standby position is located outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. That is, each of the front standby position and the reel standby position is arranged in a range excluding the overlapping range in the operation range.

  On the other hand, the front exposure position is located within the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and the reel exposure position is located within the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. That is, each of the front exposure position and the reel exposure position is arranged in an overlapping range in the operation range. Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 cannot be located at the reel exposure position. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 cannot be located at the front exposure position.

  The rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1 are so set as to minimize the overlapping of the operation ranges due to the rotation of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Are different. Specifically, the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 is set above the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. Specifically, the rotation center axis FG is arranged above the center position of the front screen mechanism E1 arranged at the front exposure position. Thus, the distance between the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis FG can be shortened, so that the operating range between the front standby position and the front exposure position in the front screen mechanism E1 can be reduced. By thus reducing the operation range, it is possible to increase the size of the front screen mechanism E1 even in a limited space in the display unit A. Note that both the rotation center axis FG and the rotation center axis RG are disposed forward of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D.

  The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on condition that one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is at the standby position. This prevents interference between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 when rotating. Details of the operations of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described later.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen casing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflector D1, a right reflector D2, a left reflector D3, and a lower reflector D4. The reflecting surfaces of the reflecting portions D1 to D4 are projection surfaces on which the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is projected, and are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. I have.

  Note that the fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflecting portions as long as it has a reflecting surface at a plurality of different angles with respect to the optical axis of irradiation light, Alternatively, a reflecting portion having a curved or arcuate reflecting surface whose center of curvature is located on the front surface side and continuously has different angles with respect to the optical axis may be provided.

  The front reflection portion D1 has a reflection surface facing the player on the front side and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B disposed in the upper front part of the fixed screen mechanism D forward. Is set to The right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 are joined to the right and left sides of the front-side reflection unit D1, and are arranged symmetrically about the front-side reflection unit D1. The right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the front reflection unit D1. Thereby, the right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 can easily reflect a part of the irradiation light while causing an image by the irradiation light to appear, because the reflection direction of the irradiation light on the reflection surface is easily directed toward the front reflection unit D1. The light is reflected in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. Also, with respect to the lower surface reflection portion D4, since the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface is more likely to be directed to the front reflection portion D1, a part of the irradiation light is caused to appear in the direction of the front reflection portion D1 while an image by the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

  In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the reflection surface is set lower than the brightness of each reflection surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected from the reflection surface of the irradiation light is smaller than the amount of light reflected from the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Thereby, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the white blur due to the mixing of light due to the irregular reflection of the reflection units D1 to D4 is prevented. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, it is possible to reduce the reflection of the irradiation light to the front reflection unit D1 in the other reflection units D2, D3, and D4, so that it is possible to reduce the white blur while making the image appear strongly in the front reflection unit D1.

As the lightness, Brightness in the L ^* a ^* b ^* color system (L ^* a ^* b ^* color space) or the L ^* u ^* v ^* color system (L ^* u ^* v ^* color space) is adopted. However, any other color can be defined as long as other colors can be represented by relative values based on white.

  The brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the brightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the same as the brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. There is no particular limitation as long as the brightness is lower than the surface brightness. For example, the brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) lower than the brightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In order to make the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the lightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. What is necessary is just to make black the color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. For example, a white paint is used as the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the paint of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. What added a black pigment to the paint applied to a substrate should just be used.

  In such a paint, the brightness of the reflection surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio between the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 includes only the white pigment among the white pigment and the black pigment, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes: Both a white pigment and a black pigment may be included. Further, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment is higher in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D than the paint applied to the base materials of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 (for example, 5 to 25% (or (About 10 to 20%)). In addition, as a coating material applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, a conventionally known coating material for a screen can be appropriately used, and can be adjusted according to a screen type (for example, a diffusion type or a reflection type). .

  It is to be noted that the black pigment is not contained in the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, but the black pigment is dispersed in the resin used as the material of the base material before the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is formed. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored and the brightness of the base material itself may be reduced.

  Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, the members constituting the screen housing C10, such as the surrounding walls (the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4), and the inside of the screen housing C10. It is desirable to lower the brightness of other members (members other than the screen) arranged in the. It is desirable that the brightness of those members is lower than the brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, as for the surrounding wall, it is not necessary to consider that an image is projected as a screen, so if the brightness is low, Lower is more desirable. That is, the color of the surrounding wall is preferably as close to black as possible.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 54, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface, and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both surfaces. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin flat panel. Thus, the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 is formed to be flat.

  On the other hand, the front screen support E12 has a holding recess E121 that holds the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to the projection screen E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding concave portion E121 is set to have two depths, a deep portion and a shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral portion of the front screen support base E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly across both ends in the short direction passing through the center portion.

  As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 abuts and is supported by the step E121a of the peripheral portion and the linear step E121b passing through the center, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. Have been in a state. As a result, the deformation of the front screen support E12 in the deep portion prevents the front screen member E11 from deforming and causing distortion on the projection surface E11a.

  The front screen support E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a partial area around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is made visible to a player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposure position. Further, the front screen support base E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is made visible to a player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position. On the first pattern surface E12a and the second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to a game effect is formed three-dimensionally by unevenness.

  The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are separately formed and then integrated by bonding with an adhesive. As a result, even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern or the like on the front screen support E12, the sink marks are mechanically separated from the front screen member E11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent distortion due to sinking of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11.

  The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to bonding with an adhesive, but may be any method such as screw fastening.

  The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As a material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, an ABS resin or the like) capable of generating sink marks when injection molding is performed may be appropriately employed. it can.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen driving mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the front screen driving mechanism E2 includes a left front screen driving mechanism E2A connected to the lower left lower surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and a right front screen driving mechanism E2A connected to the lower right lower surface of the front screen mechanism E1. And a front screen driving mechanism E2B.

  As shown in FIG. 53, when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position (in a standby posture), the front screen mechanism E1 is inclined upward from the rear end toward the front end. It is configured as follows. The inclination of the front screen mechanism E1 is substantially parallel to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15 and the inclined surface B2a1 of the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2.

  As described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position, the posture of the front screen mechanism E1 is inclined upward from the rear end toward the front end, so that the front screen mechanism E1 is parallel to the horizontal plane. In comparison with the case of the posture, the irradiation light irradiated by the irradiation light device B can be suppressed from being hindered by the front screen mechanism E1. Thus, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when located at the front standby position can be made closer to the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, even in the limited space of the display unit A, the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be increased. In addition, as described above, since the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2 has the inclined surface B2a1, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when disposed at the front standby position is set with respect to the projector mechanism B2. You can get closer. As a result, the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be further increased.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. A position where the upper end (one end) of the crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is located on the rear surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1 when the front end is located at the front exposure position (in the exposure posture). It is connected to.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by a right movable base C5 (see FIG. 45) at an intermediate position E22a. Thus, the crank member E22 is rotatable at the upper end and the lower end (the other end) about the intermediate position E22a. The intermediate position E22a coincides with the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1.

  In addition, as described above, the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed above the center position of the front screen mechanism E1 disposed at the front exposure position. Further, the crank member E22 has its upper end (one end) connected to a position on the rear surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 to be an upper position when the crank member E22 is disposed at the front exposure position (in the exposure posture). . With the above configuration, the operating range between the front standby position and the front exposure position in the front screen mechanism E1 can be reduced, so that the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be increased.

  The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a, and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as shown in FIG. 57, the center line in the upper region (a straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the middle point on the upper end side of the crank member E22) is vertically oriented in the standby posture. Is set to On the other hand, the center line (the straight line passing through the middle position E22a and the middle point at the lower end side of the crank member E22) in the lower region is set so that the lower side is inclined more forward than the upper side in the standby posture.

  A slide groove E22b is formed in a lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed such that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. The two linear portions are formed in parallel, and the slide groove E22b has a surface corresponding to the linear portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 set in parallel with the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (the distance between the two linear portions) substantially matches the member width of the slide member E26, and is set so as to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. The upper end of the slide groove E22b is set such that the slide member E26 abuts on the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture. On the other hand, the lower end of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

  The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at an eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. As shown in FIG. 55, the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 and the first support portion C23 of the right plate C2. The gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 has a line connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position E21b when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, and is formed between the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the slide member E26. It is set to have a relationship orthogonal to a line segment connecting the center point.

  Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, even if a force acts in a direction for rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the gear shaft E21a is applied in a direction in which all components of the force are applied. Exists and acts as a fixed end, so that the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-joint link having zero degrees of freedom having the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends, and the slide member E26 as a free end. Even when E1 is pressed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as strong brakes.

  An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. The intermediate gear E23 is rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 and the second support portion C24 of the right side plate C2. A motor shaft gear E24 meshes with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. Thus, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

  Here, all components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. As shown in FIGS. 58 and 60, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposed position, the line connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position E21b slides with the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22. The tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22 since the trajectory is set so as to be orthogonal to the line connecting the center point of the member E26. Accordingly, when the rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26. Therefore, the crank gear E21 starts rotating easily.

  When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b. The intermediate position E22a and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and a one-degree-of-freedom two-joint link is formed in which the slide member E26 is a free end movable along the groove wall surface. When the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 provided with the slide groove E22b in which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates around the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum, thereby rotating the upper region of the crank member E22. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

  The drive motor F24 is a stepping motor, is electrically connected to the sub-control device SS (see FIGS. 89 and 90) via the relay board CK, and is driven by the control of the sub-control device SS. .

  Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is in the stop state 0 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, gradually increases, and is intermediate between the standby posture and the exposure posture (see FIG. 59). ), The speed gradually decreases after reaching the maximum speed, and becomes the stop state 0 when the exposure posture and the standby posture are attained. Accordingly, the rotation can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration of the crank gear E21 is small (moment of inertia), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the driving mechanism ( It is possible to reduce failure and wear due to overload of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25).

  As shown in FIG. 61, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically.

  The intermediate gear E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the intermediate gear E23 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3.

  Specifically, the shaft member E3 extends in the left-right direction, and intermediate gears E23 of the left front screen driving mechanism E2A and the right front screen driving mechanism E2B are connected to both ends thereof. Further, the shaft member E3 is disposed in a space behind the fixed screen mechanism D and between the back plate C4 and the fixed screen mechanism D (see FIG. 53).

  In the above configuration, when the drive motor E25 is driven, the motor shaft gear E24 is rotated. With the rotation of the motor shaft gear E24, the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B, respectively, and the shaft member E3 rotate integrally. Then, in conjunction with the rotation of the intermediate gears E23 and E23, the crank gears E21 and E21 are rotated, so that the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated about the rotation center axis FG and the front standby position is shifted to the front standby position. It will move between the front exposure position.

  As described above, by connecting the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen driving mechanism E2A and the right front screen driving mechanism E2B by the shaft member E3, the rotational driving force of the driving motor E25 is applied to the two crank members E22. It is possible to transmit evenly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drive load from being concentrated on one of the two crank members E22 as compared with the case where the intermediate gears E23 and E23 are not connected by the shaft member E3. Further, since the drive motor E25 is provided in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B disposed to the right of the fixed screen mechanism D, the arrangement of the fixed screen mechanism D is not hindered.

  In addition, the shaft member E3 is not used as a rotation axis of the front screen mechanism E1. For this reason, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the shaft member E3 is increased, and it is possible to arrange the shaft member E3 so as not to hinder the arrangement of another accessory such as the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the additional object while maintaining the rotation range and the size of the front screen mechanism E1 at desired levels.

  Further, since the shaft member E3 is disposed behind the fixed screen mechanism D, light projected on the fixed screen mechanism D is not obstructed by the shaft member E3. In addition, since the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 is located forward of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D, the rotation center axis FG is located behind the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D. Thus, the length between the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis FG (the length of the crank member E22) can be reduced. For this reason, even when the space in the cabinet G is limited and the display unit A cannot be enlarged, the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be maintained at a desired size.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIG. 52, the reel screen mechanism F1 is made of a curved flat plate. The reel screen mechanism F1 has an arcuate shape in a side view that is curved into a shape approximating the rotating direction. The surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 has a pattern formed on the peripheral edge, and the inner peripheral area of the peripheral edge is a projection surface F1a. The projection surface F1a is an arc surface that is convex toward the upstream side in the light irradiation direction from the projector mechanism B2 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position. Further, a pattern is formed on the rear surface of the reel screen mechanism F1, which is the rotation center side. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position, the pattern on the back surface is made visible to the player in front.

  The reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatable between a reel standby position and a reel exposure position by a driving force of a reel screen driving mechanism F2. Then, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, the projection surface F1a is capable of displaying an image by irradiation of irradiation light.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen drive mechanism F2)
As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the reel screen drive mechanism F2 has two arm members F21 and F21, an arc gear F22, a motor shaft gear F23, and a drive motor F24. One end of each of the two arm members F21 is connected to the right end rear surface and the left end rear surface of the reel screen mechanism F1. Support shafts F21a, F21a projecting outward in the left-right direction are formed on the outer surfaces of the other ends of the two arm members F21, F21. These support shafts F21a and F21a are rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 and the left movable base C6, respectively. Thus, the two arm members F21 can rotate about the support shafts F21a and F21a as the center of rotation. The support shafts F21a and F21a coincide with the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The arc-shaped gear F22 is fixed to the tip of the support shaft F21a disposed on the right side of the two support shafts F21a. A motor shaft gear F23 meshes with the arc gear F22. The drive shaft of the drive motor F24 is connected to the motor shaft gear F23. The drive motor F24 is a stepping motor, is electrically connected to the sub-control device SS (see FIGS. 89 and 90) via the relay board CK, and is driven by the control of the sub-control device SS. .

  In the above configuration, when the drive motor E25 is driven under the control of the sub control device SS, the motor shaft gear E24 rotates. With the rotation of the motor shaft gear E24, the arc gear F22 rotates. Then, in conjunction with the rotation of the arc gear F22, the arm member F21 is rotated to rotate the reel screen mechanism F1 about the rotation center axis RG, and the reel standby position and the reel exposure position Will work between.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Sensor mechanism CS)
As described above, the operating ranges of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 partially overlap each other (see FIG. 53). The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are driven by different drive mechanisms. That is, the driving of each of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is not linked (synchronized). Therefore, in order to prevent interference (contact) between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, it is necessary to know the positions of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sub-control device SS (see FIGS. 89 and 90) sets the front standby position as the origin position and sets the position of the front screen mechanism E1 based on the number of steps of the drive motor E25 from this origin position. I know. Similarly, the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 is determined based on the reel standby position as the origin position and the number of steps of the drive motor F24 from the origin position.

  However, when the operation of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is not performed normally, or when the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is manually moved while the power is turned off, the sub control is performed. The device SS cannot grasp the exact positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. If the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are operated in such a situation, they may interfere with each other.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, the screen device C includes a sensor mechanism CS for detecting the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Then, the sub-control device SS performs a return operation for returning the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 to the origin positions (standby positions) based on the detection result from the sensor mechanism CS.

  In the crank member E22 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B, a light shielding portion E22d is formed in an upper region, and a light shielding portion E22e is formed in a lower region. Further, a light shielding portion F1b is formed on the back surface of the right end portion of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The sensor mechanism CS has three sensors CS1 to CS3. These sensors CS1 to CS3 are transmission-type optical sensors, and are formed in a substantially U shape as shown in FIG. One end of the U-shaped open side is a light emitting unit that emits light, and the other end is a light receiving unit that receives light. When the light emitted from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit, these sensors CS1 to CS3 output a Low signal to the sub-control device SS, the light emitted from the light emitting unit is cut off, and the light receiving unit is turned off. When a light cannot be received, a Hi signal is output to the sub control device SS.

  The sensor CS1 is a sensor for detecting whether the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position. This sensor CS1 is fixedly arranged on the rotation locus of the light shielding portion E22d of the crank member E22. Specifically, when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position (see FIG. 65), the sensor CS1 sandwiches the light-shielding portion E22d between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion, and sets the front screen mechanism E1 to the front standby position. When it does not exist at the position (see FIG. 66), the light-emitting unit and the light-receiving unit are fixedly arranged so as not to sandwich the light-shielding unit E22d. Therefore, the sensor CS1 outputs a Hi signal to the sub-control device SS when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position, and outputs a Low signal when the front screen mechanism E1 is not at the front standby position.

  The sensor CS2 is a sensor for detecting whether the front screen mechanism E1 exists at the front exposure position. This sensor CS2 is fixedly arranged on the rotation locus of the light shielding portion E22e in the crank member E22. Specifically, when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position (see FIG. 66), the sensor CS2 sandwiches the light shielding unit E22e between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit, and sets the front screen mechanism E1 to the front exposure position. (See FIG. 65), the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion are fixedly arranged at a position where the light-shielding portion E22e is not sandwiched. Accordingly, the sensor CS2 outputs a Hi signal to the sub control device SS when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position, and outputs a Low signal when the front screen mechanism E1 is not at the front exposure position.

  The sensor CS3 is a sensor for detecting whether or not the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position. This sensor CS3 is fixedly arranged on the rotation locus of the light shielding portion F1b in the reel screen mechanism F1. Specifically, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position (see FIG. 65), the sensor CS2 sandwiches the light shielding unit F1b between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit, and sets the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position. (See FIG. 67), the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit are fixedly arranged at a position where the light shielding unit F1b is not sandwiched. Therefore, the sensor CS3 outputs a Hi signal to the sub control device SS when the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position, and outputs a Low signal when the reel screen mechanism F1 is not at the reel standby position.

  In the above configuration, the detection signals from the sensors CS1 and CS2 indicate whether the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position, the front exposure position, or an intermediate position between them. I have. The detection signal from the sensor CS3 indicates whether the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position or at a position other than the reel standby position.

  Further, as described above, since the front standby position and the reel standby position are each disposed in an overlapping range in the operation range of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed in the front exposure position, The reel screen mechanism F1 cannot be arranged at the reel exposure position. Therefore, when the sensor CS2 detects that the front screen is at the front exposure position, it indicates that the reel screen mechanism F1 is not at the reel exposure position.

(Operation control of front screen mechanism E1)
Next, prior to describing the home position return operation, operation control of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 in a normal state will be described. The sub-control device SS controls the drive motor E25 to rotate the front screen mechanism E1 between the front standby position and the front exposure position. The turning operation of the front screen mechanism E1 is executed on condition that the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position.

  As mentioned earlier, the sub-control device SS sets the front standby position as the origin position, and grasps the position of the front screen mechanism E1 from the number of steps of the drive motor E25 from the origin position. For example, as shown in FIG. 68, when the number of steps is 210, it can be grasped that the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position. In the present embodiment, when the number of steps is 20-21, the detection signal of the sensor CS1 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal, and when the number of steps is 190-191, the detection signal of the sensor CS2 is detected. The signal switches between a Hi signal and a Low signal.

  The sub control device SS controls the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the front screen mechanism E1 by controlling the motor rotation direction and the pulse width of the drive motor E25. Hereinafter, in the drive motor E25, the motor rotation direction for moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position is the + direction, and the motor rotation direction for moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front exposure position to the front standby position is the-direction. And

  FIG. 69 shows an example of a control sequence of the drive motor E25 when rotating the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position. In this control sequence, first, the drive motor E25 is excited by a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the immediately preceding excitation phase (procedure 1), and then the drive motor E25 is driven in the positive direction by a pulse width of 2.2 ms. To drive 210 steps (procedure 2). As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 rotates from the front standby position to the front exposure position. Thereafter, the drive motor E25 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the immediately preceding excitation phase (procedure 3). The above is the control sequence when the rotary operation is performed from the front standby position to the front exposure position. A control sequence for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position is a sequence in which the motor rotation direction of the drive motor E25 according to the procedure 2 in the control sequence of FIG. do it.

(Operation control of reel screen mechanism F1)
Next, the normal operation control of the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described. The sub-control device SS controls the drive motor F24 to rotate the reel screen mechanism F1 between the reel standby position and the reel exposure position. The rotation operation of the reel screen mechanism F1 is executed on condition that the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the sub control device SS sets the reel standby position as the origin position, and grasps the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 from the number of steps of the drive motor F24 from the origin position. For example, when the number of steps is 140, it can be grasped that the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel exposure position. In the present embodiment, when the number of steps is 1-2, the detection signal of the sensor CS3 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal.

  The sub control device SS controls the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the reel screen mechanism F1 by controlling the motor rotation direction and the pulse width of the drive motor F24. Hereinafter, in the drive motor F24, the motor rotation direction for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position is the + direction, and the motor rotation direction for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position is the-direction. And

  FIG. 71 shows an example of a control sequence of the drive motor F24 when rotating the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position. In this control sequence, first, the drive motor F24 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the immediately preceding excitation phase (procedure 1), and then the drive motor F24 is excited in the + direction with a pulse width of 4 ms in the + direction. Drive by the number of steps (procedure 2). Thereby, the rotation of the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position is started, and the rotation speed of the reel screen mechanism F1 is accelerated. Thereafter, the drive motor F24 is driven 122 steps in the + direction with a pulse width of 3 ms (procedure 3). After that, the drive motor F24 is driven 122 steps in the + direction with a pulse width of 5 ms (procedure 4). Thereby, the rotation speed of the reel screen mechanism F1 is reduced. Then, the drive motor F24 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the immediately preceding excitation phase (procedure 5). The above is the control sequence for rotating the reel from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position. The control sequence when rotating the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position is such that the motor rotation direction of the drive motor E25 in the control sequence of FIG. What is necessary is just to make a sequence.

  As described above, the sub-control device SS drives the front screen mechanism E1 on condition that the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position, and the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position. Since the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven on the condition, it is possible to prevent interference between the screen mechanisms during rotation.

(Origin return operation of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1)
Next, the origin return operation of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described. The origin return operation is executed at a predetermined timing such as when the power is restored from the power-off state.

  Here, the detection signal of the sensor CS1 switches from the Hi signal to the Low signal when the drive motor E25 is driven in the + direction by several steps from the origin position of the front screen mechanism E1 (see FIG. 68). Therefore, even if the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal, the position of the front screen mechanism E1 may not coincide with the origin position. Similarly, even if the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal, the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 may not coincide with the origin position. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal, the origin return operation relating to the front screen mechanism E1 is performed, and even if the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal, the reel screen mechanism F1 is operated. It is configured to perform such an origin return operation.

  In addition, the sub-control device SS drives the drive motor F24 and the drive motor E25 in the home position return operation, and can execute four types of basic operations 1 to 4. The operations 1 and 2 are operations related to the front screen mechanism E1, and the operations 3 and 4 are operations related to the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The operation 1 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal. In detail, the operation 1 is an operation for driving the drive motor E25 in the + direction by about 30 to 40 steps. As a result, the detection signal output from the sensor CS1 can be reliably switched from the Hi signal to the Low signal.

  Operation 2 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS1 is a Low signal. In detail, the operation 2 is an operation in which the drive motor E25 is driven in the negative direction, and after the signal output from the sensor CS1 switches from the Low signal to the Hi signal, the drive is stopped by 20 steps. As mentioned earlier, when the number of steps of the drive motor E25 is 20-21 when the front standby position is the origin position, the detection signal of the sensor CS1 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal. Therefore, by performing the operation 2, the front screen mechanism E1 can be reliably returned to the origin position.

  Operation 3 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal. More specifically, the operation is to drive the drive motor F24 in the + direction by about 10 to 20 steps. Thereby, the detection signal output from the sensor CS3 can be reliably switched from the Hi signal to the Low signal.

  Operation 4 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS3 is a Low signal. In detail, the operation 4 is an operation in which the drive motor F24 is driven in the negative direction, and after the signal output from the sensor CS3 is switched from the Low signal to the Hi signal, the drive is stopped by driving one step. As mentioned earlier, when the reel standby position is set to the origin position and the number of steps of the drive motor F24 is 1-2, the detection signal of the sensor CS3 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal. Therefore, by performing the operation 4, the reel screen mechanism F1 can be reliably returned to the origin position.

  As shown in FIG. 72, since the sensor mechanism CS has three sensors CS1 to CS3, there are eight combinations of the detection states of these sensors CS1 to CS3 in all. Here, since the front screen mechanism E1 is not disposed at the front standby position and the front exposure position at the same time, of the eight sensor states, two of the sensor states CS1 and CS2 that are both outputting Hi signals are output. The sensor states (state 1 and state 2) indicate that an abnormality such as a failure of the sensors CS1 and CS2 has occurred. Therefore, when both the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS2 output the Hi signal, the sub-control device SS determines that an abnormality has occurred, and notifies the abnormality by voice or video using a speaker, a monitor, or the like.

  The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen according to the six sensor states (states 3 to 8) excluding the two sensor states among the eight sensor states of the sensor mechanism CS are stored in the memory of the sub control device SS. Six types of driving procedures for the mechanism F1 are stored. The six driving procedures are determined so that the screen mechanisms do not interfere with each other as much as possible. Hereinafter, a driving procedure according to each of the six types of sensor states will be described.

  When the sensors CS1 and CS3 output a Hi signal and the sensor CS2 outputs a Low signal (state 3), both the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are out of the operating range of the other screen mechanism. Are located in Accordingly, in the driving procedure according to the state 3, the sub-control device SS first returns the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position by continuously performing the operation 1 and the operation 2. Thereafter, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operations 3 and 4.

  When the sensor CS1 outputs a Hi signal and the sensors CS2 and CS3 output a Low signal (state 4), the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed outside the operation range of the reel screen mechanism F1 and the reel The screen mechanism is disposed at the reel exposure position or at an intermediate position between the reel exposure position and the reel standby position. Here, the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1 is outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1 (non-overlapping range) on the reel standby position side, and is within the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1 on the reel exposure position side. And a range (overlapping range). The boundary between the overlapping range and the non-overlapping range exists between the reel exposure position and the reel standby position. For this reason, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the intermediate position, the reel screen mechanism F1 may be arranged in an overlapping range that is within the operation range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 4, the sub-control device SS first performs the operation 4 to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position. Thereafter, the operation 1 and the operation 2 are successively performed, thereby returning the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position.

  When the sensors CS2 and CS3 output a Hi signal and the sensor CS1 outputs a Low signal in a sensor state (state 5), the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged within the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and The reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 5, the sub-control device SS first performs the operation 2 to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. Thereafter, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operations 3 and 4.

  When the sensor CS2 outputs a Hi signal and the sensors CS1 and CS3 output a Low signal (state 6), the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position and the reel screen mechanism F1 Is located at an intermediate position. In this state 6, similarly to the above-described state 4, the reel screen mechanism F1 may be located within the operation range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 6, the sub-control device SS first performs the operation 4 to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position. Thereafter, by performing the operation 2, the front screen mechanism E1 is returned to the origin position.

  When the sensor CS3 outputs a Hi signal and the sensors CS1 and CS2 output a Low signal in a sensor state (state 7), the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at an intermediate position, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is It is located outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. Accordingly, in the driving procedure according to the state 7, the sub-control device SS first performs the operation 2 to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. Thereafter, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operations 3 and 4.

  When the sensors CS1 to CS3 output a Low signal in the sensor state (state 8), the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the intermediate position, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the intermediate position or the reel exposure position. Here, the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1 is also outside the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1 (the non-overlapping range) on the front standby position side, and within the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1. Range (overlapping range). The boundary between the overlapping range and the non-overlapping range exists between the front exposure position and the front standby position. Therefore, in state 8, the front screen mechanism E1 may be located within the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1. For this reason, there is a possibility that the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are arranged within the operation range of each other. As a result, when one of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven, the other screen mechanism may move due to interference. Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are driven to perform the return operation based only on the detection results of the sensors CS1 to CS3 at the start of the return operation, one of the screen mechanisms is returned to the origin position. You may not be able to.

  Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 8, the sub-control device SS first performs the operation 2 to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. After that, the sub-control device SS determines whether the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal or a Low signal. When the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Low signal, the operation 4 is performed to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position. On the other hand, when the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal, the operations 3 and 4 are continuously performed to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position.

  As described above, when the sensor states of the sensor mechanism CS are states 3 to 7, by driving the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 in accordance with the driving procedure according to each state, the screen mechanisms may interfere with each other. And can be returned to their respective origin positions. When the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is state 8, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by a driving procedure according to the detection signal of the sensor CS3 after returning the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. Each of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 can be reliably returned to the origin position. As a result, by appropriately driving the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 in the processing after the return operation, it is possible to reliably prevent the screen mechanisms from interfering with each other.

  As a modification, when the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is state 3, the sub-control device SS returns the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position by performing the operation 3 and the operation 4 successively. By continuously performing the operation 2 and the above, the front screen mechanism E1 may be returned to the origin position.

  When the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is state 8, the sub-control device SS first performs operation 4 to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position. After that, the sub control device SS determines whether the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal or a Low signal. When the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Low signal, the operation 2 is performed to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. On the other hand, when the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal, the operations 1 and 2 may be continuously performed to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position.

  Further, the sensors CS1 to CS3 are not limited to transmission type optical sensors, and various sensors such as contact sensors can be adopted. Further, the sensor mechanism CS does not necessarily need to include the three sensors CS1 to CS3, and detects whether the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position, and detects whether the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position. If it is possible to detect whether or not the reel screen mechanism F1 is present at the reel standby position, it may be constituted by one sensor.

(Cabinet G)

(Cabinet G: medal supply mechanism MH)
As shown in FIG. 73A, a supply opening G31 for opening the atmosphere between the inside and the outside of the housing 2 is opened in the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G. The supply opening G31 is arranged at the center of the rear wall G3. When an automatic circulation replenishing device (not shown) is laid on the installation island where the gaming machine 1 is installed, the screw is inserted in a state where the medal supply port P serving as a replenishment path of the automatic circulation replenishment device is inserted into the replenishing opening G31. Stopped and fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 73B, the medal supply port P inserted through the supply opening G31 reaches above the hopper mechanism HP. Thereby, medals from the automatic circulation replenishing device can be supplied to the hopper mechanism HP.

  As shown in FIG. 73B, a medal supply mechanism MH is provided inside the housing 2 in the supply opening G31 through which the medal supply port P is inserted. The medal supply mechanism MH opens and closes the supply opening G31. That is, when the medal supply port P of the automatic circulation supply device is inserted through the supply opening G31, the supply opening G31 is released by the medal supply mechanism MH. When the medal supply port P of the automatic circulation supply device is not inserted through the supply opening G31, the supply opening G31 is closed by the medal supply mechanism MH. Hereinafter, the medal supply mechanism MH will be specifically described.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the medal supply mechanism MH has a shielding member MH1 and a guide member MH2. The shielding member MH1 is slidable in the vertical direction by the guide member MH2, and can switch between a shielding state in which the supply opening G31 is shielded and a released state in which the supply opening G31 is exposed. .

  The shielding member MH1 has a flat plate portion MH11 and a protruding portion MH12. The flat plate portion MH11 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape capable of blocking the supply opening G31 from the inside of the cabinet G of the housing 2. The flat plate part MH11 has a screw hole MH13 at the upper part and a screw hole MH14 at the lower part. Accordingly, the shielding member MH1 can be screwed and fixed to the rear wall G3 in a shielding state in which the shielding member MH1 shields the supply opening G31. The protruding portion MH12 is formed to protrude vertically from the center of the upper edge of the flat plate portion MH11 toward the inside of the cabinet G.

  The guide member MH2 is formed in a rectangular ring shape along the edge of the shielding member MH1 in a shielding state that shields the supply opening G31. The guide member MH2 is screwed and fixed to the rear wall G3 so as to sandwich the shielding member MH1. Specifically, the guide member MH2 has an upper edge MH21, two side edges MH22 and MH22, and a lower edge MH23.

  The upper edge portion MH21 is formed along the outside of the upper edge of the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state. That is, the upper edge portion MH21 is adjacent to above the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state, and regulates the movement of the shielding member MH1 in the vertical upward direction. The two side edge portions MH22, MH22 are formed along the side edges of the shielding member MH1 in a shielding state vertically downward from the one end, with both ends of the upper edge portion MH21 being one end. That is, the two side edge portions MH22 and MH22 are adjacent to the side of the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state, and regulate the movement of the shielding member MH1 to the side.

  The lower edge portion 23 is formed so as to connect the other ends of the two side edge portions MH22. The lower edge portion 23 is formed with a holding portion MH23a, a guide groove MH23b, and a screw hole MH23c. The holding portion MH23a is a notch formed at the center of the upper surface of the lower edge portion 23, and is formed to have a width larger than the width of the protrusion MH12 of the shielding member MH1. Thus, when the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state is slid vertically downward, the protrusion MH12 of the shielding member MH1 is supported by the holding portion MH23a. That is, the shielding member MH1 is held in an open state exposing the supply opening G31. Further, the holding portion MH23a is formed to be thinner than the protruding length of the protruding portion MH12. Therefore, since the protruding portion MH12 of the shielding member MH1 protrudes more than the holding portion MH23a, the protruding portion MH12 is easily grasped, and it is possible to easily shift from the open state to the shielding state.

  The guide groove MH23b is a groove that engages with the shielding member MH1 formed on the back wall G3 side, and the shielding member MH1 is slid in the vertical direction. The screw hole MH23c is formed at a position where the screw hole MH14 and the screw hole MH13 can be screwed and fixed when in the shielding state, and at a position where the screw hole MH13 and the screw hole MH13 can be screwed and fixed when in the open state.

  As shown in FIG. 76, a medal supply opening P is obliquely inserted into the supply opening G31. Above such a medal supply port P, a scaler device SK is provided. The scaler device SK includes a scaler substrate SK1 for processing position information input to a touch sensor panel disposed on a liquid crystal display panel surface, and a scaler substrate case SK2 on which the scaler substrate SK1 is installed. The scaler substrate case SK2 is a support member having a bottom surface as a concave plate formed so as to surround the medal supply port P inclined in an oblique direction. The scaler board SK1 is provided on such a scaler board case SK2 with an inclination.

(Hopper mechanism HP)
As shown in FIG. 77, a hopper mechanism HP and an overflow bucket OF are disposed below the lower space of the cabinet G.

  The hopper mechanism HP is attached to the center of the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G. The hopper mechanism HP has a structure capable of storing a large number of medals and discharging them one by one. The hopper mechanism HP pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined number or when the payment button is pressed to perform the payment of the medals. The medals paid out by the hopper mechanism HP are discharged from a medal payout exit DD14.

  The overflow bucket OF stores medals overflowing from the hopper mechanism HP. The overflow bucket OF is disposed on the right side of the hopper mechanism HP when the inside of the cabinet G is viewed from the front. The overflow bucket OF is engaged with a bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G, and is configured to be detachable from the bottom plate G91.

(Configuration of hopper mechanism HP)
As shown in FIG. 78, the hopper mechanism HP includes a bucket HP1 for storing a large number of medals, a base member HP2 to which the bucket HP1 is attached, and a payout unit (not shown) housed inside the base member HP2. I have.

  The payout unit has a function of paying out medals one by one in a fixed posture, and has a coin disk for sequentially paying out while rotating the medals accumulated in the bucket HP1. The base member HP2 has a medal payout exit DD14. By driving the coin discs of the medal payout unit integrated in the bucket HP1, the coins are ejected one by one from the medal payout exit DD14.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the bucket HP1 has an upper end opening HP11 formed of a wall surface substantially perpendicular to a horizontal plane, and an inclined side wall HP12 that is inclined at a predetermined angle continuously from the upper end opening HP11. are doing. The top opening HP11 has a substantially rectangular planar shape. A discharge guide HP13 that guides medals overflowing from the bucket HP1 to the outside of the bucket HP1 is provided at a corner portion in front of the upper end opening HP11. The discharge guide HP13 has an inclined surface that is inclined so as to decrease from the inside to the outside of the bucket HP1. The medals guided by the discharge guide HP13 are stored in the overflow bucket OF.

  The medals guided by the selector DD15 and collided with the discharge guide HP13 bounce toward the inclined side wall portion HP12 of the bucket HP1. At this time, if the amount of medals stored in the bucket HP1 has not reached the certain amount, the medals move in the bucket HP1 along the inclined side wall HP12. Thereby, the medals can be uniformly stored in the bucket HP1.

  On the other hand, when the amount of medals stored in the bucket HP1 has reached a certain amount, the medals collide with the inclined surface of the ejection guide HP13 and bounce, and collide with the medals stored in the bucket HP1 and the ejection guide HP13. Return to the slope. Then, the medals move on the inclined surface of the discharge guide HP13 by their own weight and head toward the overflow bucket OF.

  Further, on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP, guide pieces HP21 and HP22 continuously extending from the bottom surface of the hopper mechanism HP are provided. A connector HP41 connected to a connector G81 of a cabinet G described later is provided on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP.

(Configuration of overflow bucket OF)
As shown in FIG. 78, the overflow bucket OF includes a storage main body OF1 and a medal guide OF2.

  The storage main body OF1 is formed in a rectangular box shape whose upper surface is opened. The medal guide OF2 is configured to be detachable from the storage main body OF1. The medal guide OF2 guides the medals guided from the discharge guide HP13 to the overflow bucket OF to the storage main body OF1, and prevents the medals from being biased to one side of the storage main body OF1.

(Coin guard HP30)
In this gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 79, a medal supply mechanism MH (corresponding to a supply port) for discharging medals received from the outside is provided above the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP.

  Here, there is a predetermined distance in the height direction between the medal supply mechanism MH and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP (corresponding to a hopper device). When medals are supplied from the medal supply mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP, there is a predetermined distance in the height direction, so that the medals fall and collide with the medals stored in the bucket HP1, and move outward due to the momentum. May be popped out. In this case, most of the collisions with the upper end opening HP11 of the hopper mechanism HP will remain in the bucket HP1. However, in rare cases, the medal may jump over the upper end opening HP11 and jump out of the bucket HP1.

When the medal jumps out of the bucket HP1, or when the medal falls on the side of the bottom plate G91 where the power supply device DE is located or on the side where the overflow bucket OF is located, the lower door mechanism DD is opened and collected. do it. However, when a medal falls between the hopper mechanism HP and the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G, it is necessary to remove the hopper mechanism HP, which takes time and effort.
Furthermore, since the connector is electrically connected between the hopper mechanism HP and the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G, if a metal medal touches a metal part or the like of the connector, it may cause a failure. Would.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, between the medal supply mechanism MH and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, a back wall G3 of the cabinet G (corresponding to the back of the housing) and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP are provided. A coin guard HP30 (corresponding to a medal spill prevention member) is provided from the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G to the edge of the bucket HP1 so as to fill a gap HPG (see FIG. 80) therebetween.

  As shown in FIGS. 78 and 81, the coin guard HP30 is provided at a corner on the far side of the upper end opening HP11, and has an L-shape as viewed from above. The L-shaped coin guard HP30 is formed of a first guard portion HP301 facing the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and a second guard portion HP302 facing the overflow bucket OF. As described above, the first guard portion HP301 prevents the medal from dropping into the gap HPG between the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, and the second guard portion HP302 forms the overflow bucket. The medal is prevented from falling to the OF (corresponding to an auxiliary storage) side.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the first guard portion HP301 and the second guard portion HP302 of the coin guard HP30 are inclined so as to fall from the back wall G3 side of the cabinet G toward the bucket HP1 side. It has a surface HP301a. As shown in FIG. 81, two screw holes HP301c and HP301d that are screwed into the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G are formed on the front surface of the coin guard HP30.

  According to the above configuration, the coin guard HP30 is provided so as to fill the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. Even if it overflows from HP1, it can be prevented from entering into the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. Thus, it is possible to prevent the overflowing medals from collecting in the gap HPG between the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP and interfering with the connector, the electronic device, or the movable member.

  In addition, by forming the coin guard HP30 into an L-shape, the second guard portion HP302 can be disposed between the overflow bucket OF and the bucket HP1. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the medals from overflowing between the overflow bucket OF and the hopper mechanism HP.

  The coin guard HP30 has inclined surfaces HP301a and HP301b. Accordingly, even when a medal rides on the coin guard HP30, since the medal is inclined toward the bucket HP1, the medal slides down to the bucket HP1 side due to its own weight, and the medal can be normally stored in the hopper mechanism HP. it can.

(Hopper guide mechanism HG)
The substrate HG1 that constitutes the hopper guide mechanism HG is positioned by screws at the center of the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 84, the substrate HG1 has a frame body with an opening HG11 at the center, and guide rails HG12 and HG13 formed by bending both sides of the substrate HG1 in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 83, a lock member HG14 that locks with a lock member (not shown) provided at the bottom of the hopper mechanism HP is fixed to the near side of the substrate HG1 with screws. In the back, a connector G81 (corresponding to a housing-side connector) on the cabinet G side is arranged.

  The guide pieces HP21 and HP22 of the hopper mechanism HP are guided by the guide rails HG12 and HG13, so that the connector HP41 (see FIG. 85) provided on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP is connected to the connector G81 (hopper-side connector). ).

  As shown in FIG. 84, the guide rails HG12 and HG13 are formed in a U-shape by lower portions HG123 and HG133, side surfaces HG122 and HG132, and upper portions HG121 and HG131. Above the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13, projecting portions HG124 and HG134 projecting in the vertical direction are formed. The protrusions HG124 and HG134, the upper portions HG121 and HG131, the side surfaces HG122 and HG132, the lower portions HG123 and HG133, and the substrate HG1 are integrally formed by bending a single plate.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the upper portions HG121 and HG131 have tapered portions on the near side.

  The protruding portions HG124 and HG134 are formed so as to be disposed in front of the connector G81 on the cabinet G side in the upper portions HG121 and HG131. Further, the protruding portions HG124 and HG134 are shorter in the depth direction than the upper portions HG121 and HG131, and are disposed behind the upper portions HG121 and HG131.

  As shown in FIG. 84, pedestal plates HG151, HG152, and HG153 that are in contact with the bottom plate G91 and serve as pedestals for the connector G81 are formed on the back surface of the substrate HG1. The pedestal plates HG151, HG152, and HG153 are also formed by being bent integrally with the substrate HG1.

  As shown in FIG. 84, a planar space HG17 is provided on the near side of the board HG1 (on the near side of the guide rails HG12 and HG13).

  As shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, a pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on the side surface of the hopper mechanism HP are provided between the lower portions HG123 and HG133 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and the upper portions HG121 and HG131, respectively. The connector HP41 provided on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP is connected to the connector G81 by being slid to the rear side of the cabinet G in a state of being sandwiched and engaged with the connector G81.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88, for example, a pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on the side surface of the hopper mechanism HP is provided between the lower portions HG123 and HG133 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and the upper portions HG121 and HG131. When the hopper mechanism HP is slid to the rear side of the cabinet G as it is, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 abut against the protrusions HG124 and HG134, The hopper mechanism HP is restricted from sliding backward from the protrusions HG124 and HG134. Also, as shown in FIG. 88, the hopper mechanism HP in a state where the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 are in contact with the protruding portions HG124 and HG134 has a rear surface of the lower door mechanism DD when the lower door mechanism DD is closed (FIG. 88). (See the two-dot chain line DDB), and if the lower door mechanism DD is closed, it comes into contact with the hopper mechanism HP.

According to the above configuration, in order to electrically connect the connector HP41 of the hopper mechanism HP to the connector G81 on the cabinet G side, when the hopper mechanism HP is slidably mounted on the hopper guide mechanism HG, the hopper mechanism HP is slid on both sides of the hopper mechanism HP. If the pair of provided guide pieces HP21 and HP22 are not engaged with the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and are erroneously slid over the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 will By contacting the protrusions HG124 and HG134 provided above the rails HG12 and HG13 and forward of the connector G81, the hopper mechanism HP is slid at an incorrect position, and the hopper mechanism HP contacts the connector G81. Can be prevented. That is, the hopper mechanism HP can be normally slid and installed inside the cabinet G.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the hopper mechanism HP from being slid and installed at an incorrect position, the connector HP41 of the hopper mechanism HP coming into contact with the connector G81 at the incorrect position, and the connector G81 and the connector HP41 from being damaged.

  Further, when the hopper mechanism HP is slid and installed on the bottom of the cabinet G, a pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP form upper portions HG121 and HG131 and lower portions of the guide rails HG12 and HG13. In the case where the guide pieces HG12 and HG13 are erroneously shifted above the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 without being sandwiched between the HG123 and HG133, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 are moved above the guide rails HG12 and HG13. By contacting the protrusions HG124 and HG134 provided above the parts HG121 and HG131, it is possible to prevent the hopper mechanism HP from being slid and installed at an incorrect position. That is, it is possible to normally slide the hopper mechanism HP inside the cabinet G.

  Further, since a part of the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 is tapered, when the hopper mechanism HP is guided by the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the upper portions HG121 and HG12 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 are used. The HG 131 can be prevented from contacting the hopper mechanism HP.

  In addition, the lower portions HG123 and HG133, the upper portions HG121 and HG131, and the projecting portions HG124 and HG134 of the pair of guide rails HG12 and HG13 are formed by a single plate, so that the manufacturing process can be simplified. .

  In addition, since the protrusions HG124 and HG134 are located on the back side of the cabinet G, they do not hinder the temporary placement of the hopper mechanism HP around the guide rails HG12 and HG13 as a preparation stage for guiding the hopper mechanism HP to the guide rails HG12 and HG13. You can do so.

  Further, as a preparation step before guiding the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 of the hopper mechanism HP to the guide rails HG12 and HG13 in the planar space HG17 provided in front of the substrate HG1 (in front of the guide rails HG12 and HG13), The hopper mechanism HP can be temporarily placed. Thereby, the hopper mechanism HP can be slidably mounted on the hopper guide mechanism HG.

(Sheet metal BK)
As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a display unit A (corresponding to an effect device) is provided in an upper space (corresponding to an upper portion of the cabinet) of a cabinet G (corresponding to a housing). A power supply device DE and a hopper mechanism HP (corresponding to a hopper device) are provided at the bottom of the lower space of the cabinet G (corresponding to the lower portion of the housing), and the rear side of the power supply device DE and the hopper mechanism HP (cabinet). A sub-control device SS (corresponding to control means) is provided on the back wall G3 side of G. That is, the hopper mechanism HP is disposed on the front side of the sub control device SS. A sheet metal BK is provided between the hopper mechanism HP and the sub control device SS. Further, a sub relay device SN is provided between the sub control device SS and the intermediate support plate G1. Above the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, there is provided a medal replenishment mechanism MH (corresponding to a replenishment port) for replenishing metal medals from the outside. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the sheet metal BK is arranged above a corner on the far left side of the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. Further, the sheet metal BK is disposed between the first opposing surface BK1 opposing the sub-control device SS, the second opposing surface BK2 opposing the power supply device DE, and the bottom surface of the sub-control device SS and the upper surface of the bucket HP1. A third opposing surface BK3, a support surface BK4 projecting from the third opposing surface BK3 and fixing the sheet metal BK to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G with screws, a fourth opposing surface BK6 corresponding to the medal supply mechanism MH, and a sheet metal BK. And a supporting surface BK7 for fixing the fixing device to the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G with screws. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, the sheet metal BK is formed by bending a single sheet, and has a rectangular third opposing surface BK3 that contacts the bottom surface of the sub-control device SS. A square supporting surface BK4 bent downward by 90 ° to the back wall G3 side of the third facing surface BK3, and a square supporting surface BK5 bent downward by 90 ° to the power supply device DE side of the third facing surface BK3. A rectangular first facing surface BK1 bent upward by 90 ° in front of the third facing surface BK3 (a square notch BK12 is formed at the upper right in front view), and a first facing surface BK1 The second opposing surface BK2, which is bent 90 ° in the front direction to the power supply device DE, and the fourth opposing surface, which is bent 90 ° toward the rear wall G3 in the medal supply mechanism MH of the first opposing surface BK1. BK6, of the fourth opposing surface BK6 A rectangular support surface BK7 bent at 90 ° in the direction of the medal supply mechanism MH is formed on the back wall G3. The sheet metal BK is screwed to the corresponding rear wall G3 via a screw hole BK41 formed in the support surface BK4 and a screw hole BK71 formed in the support surface BK7. Thus, the sub-control device SS is arranged to be sandwiched between the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G and the first facing surface BK1 of the sheet metal BK. The sheet metal BK is made of metal, and may be fixed to a metal rear wall G3 via a support surface BK4.

  In the present embodiment, the sheet metal BK is not in contact with the sub control device SS. That is, the support surface BK4 and the first opposing surface BK1 are not in contact with the sub-control device SS. The sheet metal BK may be directly attached to the bottom of the sub control device SS. The thin sub relay device SN detachably attached to the lower surface of the intermediate support plate G1 and the thin sub control device SS detachably attached to the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G are viewed from the side. They are arranged in a state where the L-shape is upside down.

According to the above configuration, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, even if a medal is dropped on the hopper mechanism HP and jumps out to the sub-control device SS, the sheet metal BK The medal can be prevented from physically contacting the sub-control device SS. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between metal medals in the hopper mechanism HP can be prevented by the sheet metal BK.
Further, the sub-control device SS is provided at the back side of the lower space of the cabinet G and is sandwiched between the rear wall G3 and the sheet metal BK. Can not be removed. This enhances the security of the sub-control device SS.

  Further, since medals are dropped from the medal replenishment mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP, medals are likely to be repelled by the hopper mechanism HP and the repelled distance is increased. However, the medal between the sub control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP is increased. Since the sheet metal BK is provided therebetween, even if the medal is dropped on the hopper mechanism HP and greatly jumps out to the sub-control device SS side, the medal physically contacts the sub-control device SS by the sheet metal BK. Can be prevented. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between metal medals due to the drop of medals can be prevented by the sheet metal BK.

(Lower door mechanism DD)
(Lower door lock mechanism and upper door lock mechanism)
As shown in FIG. 93, a lower door lock mechanism G51 is provided at the right end of the cabinet G and the lower door mechanism DD (corresponding to the lower door). An upper door lock mechanism G52 is provided at the right end of the cabinet G and the upper door mechanism DU (corresponding to the upper door). The lower door lock mechanism G51 serves to lock the lower space of the cabinet G (corresponding to the lower part of the housing) so as to maintain a closed state. The upper door lock mechanism G52 serves to lock the upper space of the cabinet G (corresponding to the upper part of the housing) so as to maintain a closed state.

(Lower door lock mechanism G51)
As shown in FIG. 94, the lower door lock mechanism G51 includes a locked part G511 fixed to the right end of the rear wall of the lower door mechanism DD, a locking part G512 fixed to the right end of the cabinet G, And a cylinder lock G513.

  The locked part G511 has two bar-shaped locked rods G511a and G511b formed at both the upper and lower parts, formed over both ends of a concave frame G511c.

  The locking portion G512 includes a long tube G5122 and a long locking plate G5121 that is slidably arranged in the tube G5122 in a vertical direction.

  The locking plate G5121 has claw-shaped claw portions G5121a and G5121b to be locked to the locked bars G511a and G511b. The claw portions G5121a and G5121b slide in the vertical direction in the tube G5122 in accordance with the sliding of the locking plate G5121, whereby the locked rod inserted into the openings G5122a and G5122b provided in the tube G5122. G511a and G511b are locked or unlocked. In addition, the locking plate G5121 has a spring that is urged upward.

  The claw portions G5121a and G5121b are locked with the locked bars G511a and G511b when the locking plate G5121 is at the height position for locking the lower door mechanism DD, while the locking plate G5121 is locked by the lower door mechanism DD. Is set so that the lock on the locked bars G511a and G511b is released when the lock is lowered from the lock height position to the lock release height position. Further, the claw portions G5121a and G5121b have their tip surfaces inclined obliquely downward, so that the claw portions G5121a and G5121b are pressed down by contact with the locked bars G511a and G511b.

  Although not shown, the locking portion G512 has a pull-down portion in the middle. The lowering portion allows the locking plate G5121 to be pulled down as the key is inserted into the cylinder lock G513 and rotated. Accordingly, the locking between the claw portions G5121a and G5121b and the locked bars G511a and G511b can be released by descending as the locking plate G5121 is lowered.

(Upper door lock mechanism G52)
As shown in FIG. 94, the upper door lock mechanism G52 includes a locked part G521 fixed to the right end of the back wall of the upper door mechanism DU and a locked part G522 fixed to the right end of the cabinet G. Have.

  The locked portion G521 has two bar-shaped locked bars G521a and G521b formed at both the upper and lower portions formed over both ends of a concave frame G521c.

  The locking portion G522 includes a long cylinder G5222 (corresponding to a locking cylinder) and a long locking plate G5221 (corresponding to a locking member) arranged to be vertically slidable in the cylinder G5222. are doing.

  The locking plate G5221 has claw-shaped claw portions G5221a and G5221b (corresponding to locking portions) to be locked to the locked bars G521a and G521b. The claw portions G5221a and G5221b slide in the vertical direction in the cylinder G5222 in accordance with the sliding of the locking plate G5221, so that the locked rod inserted into the openings G5222a and G5222b provided in the cylinder G5222. It is locked to G521a / G521b or unlocked (see FIG. 97).

  The claw portions G5221a and G5221b are locked with the locked bars G521a and G521b when the locking plate G5221 is at a height position for locking the upper door mechanism DU, while the locking plate G5221 is locked by the upper door mechanism DU. Is set so that the lock on the locked bars G521a and G521b is released when the lock is lowered from the lock height position to the lock release height position. Further, as shown in FIG. 96, the claw portions G5221a and G5221b have their tip surfaces inclined obliquely downward, so that the claw portions G5221a and G5221b are pressed down by contact with the locked bars G521a and G521b.

  As shown in FIG. 95, an opening G5222c is formed below the upper door mechanism DU in the cylinder G5222 of the locking portion G522, and the projection G5221c provided on the locking plate G5221 is provided with the opening G5222c. And protrudes to the inside of the cabinet G. By lowering the protrusion G5221c downward, the locking plate G5221 is lowered, and accordingly, the locking between the claw portions G5221a and G5221b and the locked bars G521a and G521b can be released.

  Here, when the protrusion G5221c is slid upward and the locking plate G5221 is at a height position for locking the upper door mechanism DU, the protrusion G5221c is moved to the upper DDU of the lower door mechanism DD (see FIG. 93). ).

  According to the above configuration, in a state where the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the upper DDU of the lower door mechanism DD physically interferes with the protrusion G5221c, thereby stopping the locking plate G5221 from sliding. The locking between the portions G5221a and G5221b and the locked bars G521a and G521b can be prevented from being released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be locked so as not to be opened.

  On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is open, the physical interference with the projection G5221c of the upper DDU of the lower door mechanism DD is released, so that the locking plate G5221 can slide in the cylinder G5222, The locking of the portions G5221a and G5221b to the locked bars G521a and G521b is released, and the locking of the upper door mechanism DU to the cabinet G can be released.

  Accordingly, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, a procedure for unlocking the lower door mechanism DD by the lower door lock mechanism G51 can be required first. That is, in order to open the upper door mechanism DU, it is necessary to unlock the lower door lock mechanism G51, open the lower door mechanism DD, and then unlock the upper door lock mechanism G52. Security can be increased. Further, security can be improved in the upper space of the cabinet G as compared with the lower space of the cabinet G, and the lower space of the cabinet G can be accessed more smoothly than in the upper space of the cabinet G. Can be a place.

  In order to unlock the lower door mechanism DD, it is necessary to unlock the cylinder lock G513 with a key. For the administrator of the gaming machine 1, there is an advantage that the key is easy to manage because the key is compact and portable.

  In addition, the sliding of the locking plate G5221 causes the claw portions G5221a and G5221b to be hooked on the locked bars G521a and G521b, and the hooks are released. Thus, the upper door mechanism DU can be locked to the upper space of the cabinet G in conjunction with the sliding of the locking plate G5221.

  In addition, the upper door lock mechanism G52 is provided at the end opposite to the pivotally supported end and is disposed on the side where the upper door mechanism DU is opened and closed, so that the upper door lock mechanism G52 is unlocked. Therefore, it is not necessary to open the lower door mechanism DD greatly. Thereby, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is not necessary to unnecessarily expose the lower space of the cabinet G to the outside, and it is possible to enhance security.

  As shown in FIG. 98, between the lower door mechanism DD and the cabinet G, a one-way hinge DD54 that applies a predetermined torque in the direction in which the lower door mechanism DD closes is employed. Accordingly, when closing the lower door mechanism DD, torque is applied, and the lower door mechanism DD can be closed quietly with respect to the cabinet G without applying a sudden load. Thus, it is possible to prevent a sudden load from being applied to the protruding portion B131 physically interfered by the lower door mechanism DD.

(Relationship between power supply device DE and speaker DD25L)
As shown in FIG. 99, a speaker DD25L (corresponding to an acoustic device) is provided on the lower part of the lower side of the lower door DD1 (corresponding to the door) of the lower door mechanism DD (the lower space side of the cabinet G (corresponding to the housing)). Is provided. On the other hand, a power supply device DE (corresponding to a power supply device) is provided in a lower space of the cabinet G (corresponding to the inside of the housing). The speaker DD25L and the power supply device DE are arranged to face each other when the lower door mechanism DD is closed with respect to the cabinet G (see FIG. 101).

  The power supply device DE is disposed on the left side of the hopper mechanism HP when viewing the inside of the cabinet G from the front. The power supply device DE plays a role of converting AC voltage power supplied from the outside into DC voltage power required in each unit, and supplying the converted power to each device constituting the gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 100, on the front side of the power supply device DE, there is provided a power switch DE1 for switching whether or not to supply power (ON / OFF) to the equipment constituting the gaming machine 1. Further, two slide rails DE3 are provided on both sides of the power switch DE1 in a vertical direction. The switch cover DE2 is slidable on the slide rail DE3 in the vertical direction. Thus, when the switch cover DE2 is slid downward along the slide rail DE3, as shown in FIG. 99, the switch cover DE2 covers the power switch DE1 (the closed state of the switch cover DE2). On the other hand, when the switch cover DE2 is slid upward along the slide rail DE3, the power switch DE1 is exposed as shown in FIG. 100 (the open state of the switch cover DE2). By providing the switch cover DE2 in this way, it is possible to prevent direct access to the power switch DE1 from outside, thereby enhancing security.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the switch cover DE2 has an inclined surface DE2a that is inclined so as to protrude downward from above.

  On the other hand, a convex portion DD25L1 (corresponding to an engagement portion) protruding toward the power supply device DE is formed on the back side (the surface facing the power supply device DE) of the speaker DD25L, as shown in FIG. The convex portion DD25L1 has an inclined surface DD25La that is inclined so as to project upward from below.

  In the speaker DD25L, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed with respect to the cabinet G, the convex portion DD25L1 interrupts above (sliding path) above the switch cover DE2 when the switch cover DE2 is in the closed state, and switches the switch. The cover DE2 is formed at a position for restricting the cover DE2 from sliding upward.

According to the above configuration, by closing the lower door mechanism DD, the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided on the back surface of the lower door DD1 interrupts the sliding path (moving path) of the switch cover DE2, and the switch cover DE2 is closed. The opening state can be restricted. On the other hand, by opening the lower door mechanism DD, the restriction on the switch cover DE2 of the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided on the back surface of the lower door DD1 is released, so that the switch cover DE2 is slid upward and the power switch is turned on. It is possible to switch from the closed state where the operation of DE1 is not possible to the open state where the power switch DE1 is operable.
Thereby, while ensuring the operability of the power switch DE1 in a state where the lower door mechanism DD is opened, an unauthorized operation on the power supply device DE can be prevented to enhance security.

  Further, by sliding the switch cover DE2 up and down, it is possible to switch between the open state and the closed state. This makes it easy to access the power switch DE1 with the lower door mechanism DD opened.

  Further, since the convex portion DD25L1 provided on the speaker DD25L has a convex shape, the volume of the speaker DD25L itself can be increased by an amount protruding toward the power supply device DE, and the sound quality can be improved simultaneously. .

Further, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed while the switch cover DE2 is in the closed state, the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2 and the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 are arranged at positions facing each other, and the sliding of the switch cover DE2 is performed. Movement can be regulated.
On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed when the switch cover DE2 is in the open state, the switch cover DE2 is at a position displaced upward from the closed state, so that the slope DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 is The switch cover DE2 slides downward and moves to the closed position because the switch DE2 slides downward to come into contact with the inclined surface DE2a of the cover DE2.
As a result, even if the lower door mechanism DD is closed while the switch cover DE2 is closed and the switch cover DE2 is closed, the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 is attached to the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2. The switch cover DE2 can be slid and moved to the closed position in conjunction with the closing operation of the lower door mechanism DD because the switch is pressed in contact with the lower door mechanism DD.

(Maximum BET button DD8)
The maximum BET button DD8 (corresponding to a button unit) is arranged on a second pedestal portion DD2b (corresponding to a pedestal portion). An opening DD2ba is formed in the second pedestal DD2b, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 105, the opening DD2ba has a predetermined depth, has a side wall DD2bc so as to surround the opening DD2ba, and a flange DD2bb is formed at the bottom of the side wall DD2bc. As shown in FIG. 102, the maximum BET button DD8 includes an operation unit DD81 and a locking unit DD82.

(Operation unit DD81)
As shown in FIG. 106, the operation unit DD81 includes a first member DD812, a button base DD811, a spring DD813 (corresponding to an elastic member), a photo sensor DD814, a second member DD815, and a button base cover DD816. Have.

  The first member DD812 has a button base DD8123, a button cover DD8121, and a button sheet DD8122. As shown in FIG. 106, the first member DD812 is arranged so as to be able to be pushed down (in the direction A).

  The button cover portion DD8121 is arranged above the button base portion DD8123. The button cover portion DD8121 is engaged with and fixed to an edge of the button base portion DD8123. The button cover portion DD8121 has a function as a cover that constitutes a surface directly pressed by the player.

  The button sheet DD8122 is arranged between the button base DD8123 and the button cover DD8121. The button sheet DD8122 is made of a flat plate-shaped light-transmitting resin sheet and has a light distribution property.

  The button base DD8123 is arranged above the button base DD811. The button base DD8123 has two cylindrical sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b on the lower side. A cylindrical screw hole is formed below the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b. Further, a spring holding portion DD8124c that holds the spring DD813 is formed between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b. The spring holding portion DD8124c is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter as the spring DD813.

  Between the button base DD8123 and the button base DD811 is provided a spring DD813 having an elastic force to repel a force for pushing down the first member DD812 downward (A direction). The spring DD813 is formed by a coil spring formed in a cylindrical shape. One end of the spring DD813 is arranged and held on the outer periphery of the spring holding portion DD8124c. The other end of the spring DD813 is in contact with the lower part of the button base DD811. For this reason, the spring DD813 repels the force of the player pushing down the button cover portion DD8121 of the first member DD812 downward (in the direction A).

  The button base DD811 is formed in a rectangular box shape whose upper surface is opened. Two through holes DD811a and DD811b are formed in the lower part of the button base DD811. The through-holes DD811a and DD811b are opened in the up-down direction, so that two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b can be slid, respectively. Therefore, the outer dimensions of the through holes DD811a and DD811b are formed to be larger than the inner diameter of the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b. A flange DD8111 projecting outward is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the button base DD811. The flange DD8111 contacts the upper surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba provided in the second pedestal portion DD2b (see FIG. 105). Therefore, the flange DD8111 has a shape larger than the outer shape of the opening DD2ba, and when the operation unit DD81 is inserted from above the opening DD2ba, the portion including the bottom and the four side surfaces of the button base DD811 has Pass through the opening DD2ba, but the flange DD8111 is regulated by contacting the upper surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba.

  The button base DD811 is provided with a stop plate DD8112 that protrudes in the horizontal direction on a side surface portion DD8113 extending from the side surface of the button base DD811. Further, two communication holes DD816a and DD816b are formed in the side surface portion DD8113. The shape and area of the bottom surface of the button cover DD8121 are the same as the shape and area of the upper surface of the button base DD811 including the flange DD8111. That is, the button cover portion DD8121 and the button base DD811 have a shape that exactly overlaps in the vertical direction.

  The second member DD815 is arranged below the button base DD811 (direction A). The second member DD815 has cylindrical screw holes DD815a and DD815b. The sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b of the button base portion DD8123 pass through the through holes DD811a and DD811b, and the lower portions of the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extend from the through holes DD811a and DD811b. Are screwed together with the screw holes DD815a and DD815b formed in the second member DD815 by the screws DD8152a and DD8152b. As a result, the second member DD815 is attached between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the two through holes DD811a and DD811b. The second member DD815 has a larger shape than the through holes DD811a and DD811b.

  Further, in the second member DD815, a thin plate-shaped light shielding piece DD8151 that protrudes in the vertical direction is provided between the screw hole DD815a and the screw hole DD815b.

  Below the second member DD815 (direction A), there is provided a photosensor DD814 in which a light emitting unit DD814a and a light receiving unit DD814b face each other at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. The predetermined interval is set to be larger than the thickness of the light shielding piece DD8151 in the horizontal direction. A transmission connector is provided on the back of the photosensor DD814, and is connected by an external connector DD85.

  The button base cover DD816 is formed in a box shape with the lower side of the button base DD811 and the side facing the side face DD8113 opened. Above the button base cover DD816, claw-shaped locking portions DD8161 and DD8162 are formed, and the claw-shaped locking portions DD8161 and DD8162 are locked portions DD8113a and DD8113b provided at the lower portion of the button base DD811. The button base cover DD816 is fixed to the lower part of the button base DD811. The button base cover DD816 has two screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b.

  When the player presses the first member DD812 downward (direction A), the second member DD815 also moves downward (direction A). When the second member DD815 moves, the light blocking piece DD8151 interrupts between the light emitting unit DD814a and the light receiving unit DD814b, and blocks light emitted from the light emitting unit DD814a to the light receiving unit DD814b. Thus, it is detected that the player has operated the maximum BET button DD8.

  When the player stops pressing the first member DD812 downward (direction A), the button base DD8123 moves upward due to the repulsive force of the spring DD813 (the first member DD812 moves to the initial position). Will return). When the button base DD8123 moves upward due to the repulsive force of the spring DD813, the upper surface of the second member DD815 contacts the lower surface of the stop plate DD8112, and the second member DD815 and the first member DD812 return too upward. Regulate that.

  As a result, when the second member DD815 moves upward, the light shielding piece DD8151 that has been interrupted between the light emitting unit DD814a and the light receiving unit DD814b also moves upward, and light is emitted from the light emitting unit DD814a to the light receiving unit DD814b. The light blocking is released. Thereby, it is detected that the player has not operated the maximum BET button DD8.

  According to the above configuration, the second member DD815 has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b provided in the button base DD811, and the sliding portion DD8124a of the first member DD812 extending from the through holes DD811a and DD811b.・ Attached to DD8124b. This allows the second member DD815 to prevent the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b of the first member DD812 from coming out of the through holes DD811a and DD811b, thereby preventing unauthorized removal of the maximum BET button DD8.

  In addition, the light-shielding piece DD8151 allows the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b to slide through the two through holes DD811a and DD811b of the button base DD811 in conjunction with the player pressing the first member DD812. A light-shielding piece DD8151 provided at an intermediate portion of the second member DD815 attached between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the DD811a and DD811b cuts off between the light-emitting portion DD814a and the light-receiving portion DD814b. can do.

(Locking part DD82)
As shown in FIG. 103, the locking portion DD82 has a box shape, and connects the opening DD821 formed on the upper surface of the locking portion DD82 and the connector DD85 to the back surface of the operation portion DD81. It has an opening DD822 formed on the back surface of the locking portion DD82.

  A flange DD823 projecting outward is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the opening DD821 of the locking portion DD82, and further, the flange DD823 projects vertically outside the flange DD823 so as to surround the flange DD823. An enclosing frame DD824 is formed. The flange DD823 contacts the lower surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba (see FIG. 105). Therefore, the flange DD823 has a shape larger than the outer shape of the opening DD2ba, and when the locking portion DD82 is pressed from below the opening DD2ba, the flange DD823 portion contacts the lower surface of the flange DD2bb. It is regulated by contact.

  On the inner wall side of the locking portion DD82, a locking piece DD825 for positioning the operation portion DD81 when the operation portion DD81 is stored is formed. In addition, communication holes DD826a and DD826b provided on both sides of an opening DD822 formed on the back surface of the locking portion DD82 are formed.

  The operation portion DD81 is inserted into the opening portion DD2ba from above, and the locking portion DD82 is attached to the operation portion DD81 from below the opening portion DD2ba in a state where the flange DD8111 is in contact with the upper surface of the flange DD2bb. , The flange DD823 is brought into contact with the lower surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba. The two screws DD83a and DD83b are screwed into the screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b via the communication holes DD826a and DD826b and the communication holes DD816a and DD816b, respectively (see FIG. 104).

  According to the above configuration, the two screws DD83a and DD83b are screwed into the screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b via the communication holes DD826a and DD826b and the communication holes DD816a and DD816b, respectively, thereby locking the operation unit DD81. The portion DD82 can be fixed to the second pedestal portion DD2b via the opening DD2ba. Further, since the operation unit DD81 has the flange DD8111 larger than the opening DD2ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from dropping from the outside of the opening DD2ba to the inside of the cabinet G. Further, since the locking portion DD82 also has the flange DD823 larger than the opening DD2ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from going out of the cabinet G from inside the opening DD2ba. Thereby, the maximum BET button DD8 can be fixed to the second pedestal portion DD2b.

In addition, since the button cover portion DD8121 and the button base DD811 have a shape that exactly overlaps in the vertical direction, when the button cover portion DD8121 is viewed from above, the button base portion DD811 is hidden by the button cover portion DD8121, and the external In addition, only the button cover portion DD8121 pressed by the player can be shown. Thereby, the appearance of the maximum BET button DD8 can be simplified, and the design of the appearance of the gaming machine 1 can be enhanced.
In addition, the button cover portion DD8121 has a structure in which the shape of the bottom surface is smaller than the shape of the upper surface of the button base DD811, and the button cover portion DD811 has a structure that can more easily prevent unauthorized intrusion through the gap between the through holes DD811a and DD811b. be able to.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel device M1)
(Lower door mechanism DD)
As shown in FIG. 107, the lower door mechanism DD is provided with a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening substantially in the center of the upper part. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is mounted on the back surface side of the main display window DD4. Further, a main control board MS is mounted on the back surface of the reel unit RU.

  The reel unit RU mainly includes three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn on each outer peripheral surface. These reels RL, RC, RR are arranged in a side-by-side state (horizontal one row) so that they can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. On the reels RL, RC, RR, the operations of the reels RL, RC, RR and the symbols drawn on the reels RL, RC, RR can be visually recognized through the main display window DD4.

  A transparent panel DD41 made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window DD4 so that a player or the like cannot touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, first, second, and third pedestals DD2a, DD2b, DD2c that are substantially horizontal are formed. A medal insertion slot DD5 for inserting medals is provided in the first pedestal portion DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4. The medal insertion slot DD5 is an opening through which medals are inserted by the player. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot DD5 are credited or bet on the game.

  The second pedestal portion DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a maximum BET button DD8 (also referred to as a MAXBET button) as an active line setting means for betting credited medals. When the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed, “3” is selected as the number of inserted medals.

  The liquid crystal display device DD20 is provided in the third pedestal portion DD2c located on the front side of the main display window DD4. The liquid crystal display device DD20 is a so-called touch panel in which a touch sensor panel as a touch-type position input device is arranged on a panel surface of a liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). The touch sensor panel may be, for example, of a capacitance type that detects contact with a part of a human body (such as a fingertip) or an electrostatic pen and outputs a detection signal thereof, or It may be of a type that detects contact of a hard substance such as a pen tip and outputs a detection signal, or may be of another type or structure (such as an in-cell structure).

  The liquid crystal display device DD20 functions as an SUI (smart user interface). On the display screen, for example, game information such as the number of games is displayed as the game progresses, and the selection by the player is performed. Alternatively, a message or an input key for requesting an input is displayed.

  In addition, in the liquid crystal display device DD20, it is also possible to display, on the display screen, contents (production information) corresponding to the production related to the game, for example, as the game progresses. In addition, as the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, an attachment having a function as a directing effect, or a jog dial or a push button as a dedicated attachment may be provided. Further, the function of the liquid crystal display device DD20 can be omitted by distributing its functions to a display unit A or the like described later.

  On the front side of the maximum BET button DD8, there is provided a start lever DD6 for rotating the reels RL, RC, RR by operation of the player and for starting the variable display of symbols in the main display window DD4. The start lever DD6 is attached so as to be tiltable within a predetermined angle range.

  On the right side of the start lever DD6, on the front side of the liquid crystal display device DD20, there are three stop buttons DD7L for stopping the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, RR respectively by a pressing operation (stop operation) by the player. , DD7C, DD7R.

  A C / P button DD13 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button DD8. The C / P button DD13 is for switching the credit / payout of medals obtained by the player by a push button operation. In a state where payout is selected by switching the C / P button DD13 (non-credit state), medals are discharged from a medal payout opening DD14 (cancel chute) provided in a coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD. The paid-out medals are stored in the medal receiving section DD15.

  A waist panel DD18 (waist light guide plate) is arranged below the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R. The waist panel DD18 is configured as a cosmetic panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the waist panel DD18, a name indicating the model of the gaming machine 1, various patterns, and the like are drawn by printing.

  Further, a speaker DD25L is provided on the left side of the medal payout exit DD14, and a speaker DD25R is provided on the right side. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information related to the game by sounds such as voices and music. Further, a first sub-display device DD19L and a second sub-display device DD19R are arranged on the left and right sides of the main display window DD4, respectively. These sub-display devices DD19L and DD19R display, for example, the number of paid out medals and the number of remaining credited medals at the time of winning. Normally, the maximum number of medals to be credited to the gaming machine 1 is 50, so a credit number of 50 or less is displayed. In the state where the maximum number of medals of 50 has been credited, the inserted medals are paid out from the medal payout exit DD14 as they are. Further, the sub-display devices DD19L and DD19R may have a touch panel on the front surface.

(Relationship between the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS)
As shown in FIG. 108, the lower door mechanism DD of the gaming machine 1 is configured to include a lower door DD1, a reel unit RU, and a main control board MS.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the lower door DD1 (corresponding to a door) is provided to be able to open and close with respect to a cabinet G (corresponding to a housing). As shown in FIG. 110, the reel unit RU (corresponding to symbol display means) is detachably provided on the back side of the lower door DD1 (inside the cabinet G (the lower space side)). Further, as shown in FIG. 110, the main control board MS is detachably provided on the back side of the reel unit RU (inside of the cabinet G (lower space side)).

  The main control board MS rotates the reels RL, RC, RR of the reel unit RU based on a command signal output from the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R (corresponding to command means). To stop the symbols arranged on the reels RL, RC, RR.

  By integrating the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS by the positional relationship between the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS as described above, the gaming machine 1 The work for assembling, replacing parts, and disassembling can be easily performed.

  In addition, the main control board MS is an important component for controlling the game, and requires measures to prevent unauthorized removal. However, the main control board MS is difficult to remove because it is integrated with the reel unit RU. It can be configured.

  The main control board MS is provided on the back surface of the reel unit RU provided inside the lower door DD1. Thereby, the main control board MS can be disposed on the far side of the cabinet G far from the lower door DD1 by the thickness of the lower door DD1 and the reel unit RU. For this reason, a physical distance between the lower door DD1 and the main control board MS can be ensured, and even if an illegal intrusion is made through a gap between the lower door DD1, the vehicle reaches the main control board MS. And security can be improved.

  Further, since the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrated, when changing the specifications of the gaming machine 1, the exterior of the lower door DD1, the reel RL of the reel unit RU, The change of the symbols of RC and RR and the change of the game content can be performed collectively.

  Specifically, with reference to FIG. 111, the attachment of the main control board MS to the reel unit RU will be described. As shown in FIG. 111, the reel unit RU has a substrate contact surface part RU9a at the rear. The substrate contact surface part RU9a is a plane part extending in the left-right direction at the center in the vertical direction on the back side of the reel unit RU. The normal direction of the flat portion substantially coincides with the front-back direction. Further, the reel unit RU has an upper flat portion RU9b above the center right of the substrate contact surface portion RU9a. The upper plane part RU9b is a plane part whose plane direction matches the substrate contact surface part RU9a, and has a screw hole at the upper left. Further, the reel unit RU has a mounting portion RU9c whose length in the left-right direction is substantially equal to that of the substrate contact surface RU9a below the substrate contact surface RU9a. The mounting portion RU9c includes a substrate contact surface portion RU9a and a wall surface portion whose surface direction coincides with the upper flat surface portion RU9b, a bottom surface portion bent and extended in a horizontal rearward direction from a lower portion of the wall surface portion, and a rear portion of the bottom surface portion. And an inclined portion that is bent from the end and extended with an inclination upward and backward. The mounting portion RU9c has screw holes at both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the reel unit RU has a substrate contact surface part RU9a and a plane part whose surface direction matches the upper plane part RU9b.

  The main control board MS is mounted on the bottom surface of the mounting portion RU9c, and comes into surface contact with the substrate contact surface portion RU9a, the upper flat surface portion RU9b, the wall surface portion of the mounting portion RU9c, and other flat surfaces having the same surface direction. It is positioned in the state where it was done. Then, in this state, the screws are screwed into the screw holes of the upper flat portion RU9b and the mounting portion RU9c via the through holes formed in the main control board MS. As a result, the main control board MS is stably attached to the board contact surface RU9a, the upper flat part RU9b, and the mounting part RU9c arranged on the same plane.

  Next, the attachment of the reel unit RU to the lower door DD1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 112, the reel unit RU has a reel hinge RU21 at the left end. The reel hinge RU21 is a U-shaped flat plate member in a plan view, and the normal direction of the plane substantially matches the front-back direction. The reel hinge RU21 has an upper hinge RU21a formed downward from the upper left end. The reel hinge RU21 has a lower hinge RU21b formed downward from the lower left end. The upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b are formed such that their central axes coincide.

  At the upper left side on the inner side of the lower door DD1, a reel hinge base DD18 extending from the upper end to the center is provided. The reel hinge base DD18 has an upper hinge base DDR18a and an upper hinge base DDR18b at positions corresponding to the upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b. The upper hinge base DDR18a and the lower hinge base DDR18b can be inserted with the upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b, respectively. In the inserted state, the reel unit RU is centered on the upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b. It is rotatably supported.

  The reel unit RU has an upper right lock portion RU22 protruding rightward at the upper right end. Further, the reel unit RU has a lower lock portion RU23 that protrudes downward from substantially the center of the lower end portion. The upper right lock part RU22 and the lower lock part RU23 can be locked in contact with the inner wall surface of the lower door DD1. That is, when the reel unit RU is rotated in the direction of the lower door DD1 and brought into contact with the lower door DD1, the upper right lock portion RU22 and the lower lock portion RU23 come into contact with the lower door DD1. The upper right lock unit RU22 and the lower lock unit RU23 are locked to the lower door DD1, so that the reel unit RU can be maintained in a rotation impossible state.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel device RU)
As shown in FIG. 113, the reel device RU has three reel units RU1, a reel base RU2, and a reel cover RU3. The three reel units RU1 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (one horizontal row). The left reel unit RU1 has a reel RL, the central reel unit RU1 has a reel RC, and the right reel unit RU1 has a reel RR. Each reel unit RU1 is independently supported by a reel base RU2. The reel base RU2 is formed in a box shape having an open surface, and accommodates each reel unit 1 in a partially exposed state. A reel cover RU3 is attached to the reel base RU2 by screwing so as to cover the open surface. When the reel cover RU3 is attached to the reel base RU2, the outer peripheral surface from the center to the upper part of the reels RL, RC, RR in each reel unit RU1 is exposed from the reel base RU2. As a result, the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels RL, RC, RR become visible.

  Further, the reel unit RU1 has a motor mounting plate RU11 which supports a reel shaft and is a support plate to which a motor serving as a driving force of the reel is mounted. The motor mounting plate RU11 is disposed on the right side of the reel unit RU1, and rotatably supports the reel. That is, they are arranged so as to be sandwiched between the adjacent reel units RU1. The motor mounting plate RU11 has a front part RU11a forming a front part. The front part RU11a is formed in a substantially arcuate shape in a side view, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view. Note that the bow shape is a figure surrounded by an arc and a chord connecting the ends of the arc.

  Specifically, the motor mounting plate RU11 has a substantially arcuate front portion RU11a in side view and a shape continuously formed rearward from both ends of an arc defining the arc in side view (for example, in side view). (Substantially rectangular shape) rear portion RU11b. Note that the motor mounting plate RU11 may directly support the reel, or may indirectly support the reel via another member.

  The front portion of the motor mounting plate RU11, which is formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view, has substantially the same size as the front portion of the opposing reel, and it is desirable that both overlap. That is, when viewed from one side, the front portion of the motor mounting plate RU11 is substantially completely covered by the reel, and when viewed from the other side, the portion of the reel facing the portion by the front portion of the support plate. Is desirably almost completely covered. This makes it possible to achieve a good balance between providing the motor mounting plate RU11 with a function as a partition plate and maintaining the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel unit RU: reel unit RU1)
The reel unit RU1 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the three reel units RU1 have the same configuration, only the right reel unit RU1 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 114, a reel index RU111, a sensor unit RU112, a motor drive unit RU113, and a drive control board RU114 are provided on the motor mounting plate RU11 of the reel unit RU1. The reel index RU111 is arranged at the center of the motor mounting plate RU11. The sensor unit RU112 is arranged behind the reel index RU111. The motor drive unit RU113 is arranged above the reel index RU111.

  The reel RR has a reel drum RR1. The reel drum RR1 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a reel band RR2 on which a plurality of symbols are arranged is wound and fixed. In the reel drum RR1, a frame for increasing rigidity is disposed on a surface on the left side (the side opposite to the motor mounting plate RU11) of the cylindrical portion, radially from the center and concentric circles smaller than the outer circumferential circle. . This frame has a shape in which the center portion is depressed rightward (inside of the cylinder). On the reel drum RR1, a rotary gear RR3 having the same central axis is disposed on the left side (frame side) inside the cylindrical shape. That is, inside the reel drum RR1, the reel index RU111, the sensor unit RU112, and the motor drive unit RU113 are arranged on the right side (motor mounting plate RU11) of the rotating gear RR3. Further, on the reel drum RR1, a backlight RR4 that illuminates the symbols arranged on the stopped reel RR from behind is arranged on the radially inner wall surface inside the cylindrical shape.

  The motor driving unit RU113 has a stepping motor and a driving gear meshing with the rotating gear RR3, and power from the stepping motor for rotating the reel RR is transmitted by the rotating gear RR3. The stepping motor is rotated by the number of drive pulses supplied from the drive control board RU114. That is, the number of drive pulses supplied from the drive control board RU114 can specify how much the reel RR has been rotated (the degree of displacement) from the reference position. The start and stop of rotation of the motor drive unit RU113 are controlled by the drive control board RU114 according to a control signal from the main control board MS. Specifically, a start command signal is transmitted to the main control board MS in response to an operation on a start command means such as the start lever DD6 by the player. The main control board MS transmits a start control signal to the drive control board RU114 upon detecting the start command signal. The drive control board RU114 drives the motor drive unit RU113 when the start control signal is detected, and the reel RR is rotated. As a result, the symbols arranged on the reel RR are variably displayed. In addition, a stop command signal is transmitted to the main control board MS in response to the operation of the stop command means such as the stop button DD7R by the player. The main control board MS transmits a stop control signal to the drive control board RU114 upon detection of the stop command signal. The drive control board RU114 drives the motor drive unit RU113 upon detection of the stop control signal, and the reel RR is stopped. Thus, the symbols arranged on the reel RR are stopped and displayed.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel unit RU: reel unit RU1: reel index RU111)
The reel index RU111 has a reel shaft RU1111, a detection piece RU1112, and a connection plate RU1113. The reel shaft RU1111 is rotatable about the left-right direction in the reel index RU111. The reel shaft RU1111 can be connected and fixed to the rotation shaft of the rotating gear RR3 at the left end, and is rotated with the rotation of the rotating gear RR3. That is, when the reel RR is rotated by the motor driving unit RU113, the reel shaft RU1111 is rotated. The detection piece RU1112 is formed in a figure shape surrounded by an arc-shaped outer periphery and an arc-shaped inner periphery in a side view. In the present embodiment, the angles of the arcs of the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the detection piece RU1112 are set to 180 degrees, respectively, and are formed by cutting a disk having a concentric opening at the center by a line passing through the center point. ing. A disc-shaped connection plate RU1113 is connected to the inside of the inner periphery of the detection piece RU1112 along the inner periphery. The connection plate RU1113 has a circular hole at the center, and the reel shaft RU1111 is inserted and fixed. Thus, the reel index RU111 is connected to the rotating gear RR3 via the reel shaft RU1111. Therefore, the reel index RU111 and the rotating gear RR3 are formed separately from each other. Note that it is preferable to use a material having high slidability for the rotating gear RR3. Further, it is preferable to use a material having an excellent antistatic function for the detection piece RU1112 in the reel index RU111.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 115, the detection piece RU1112 moves around the rotation axis of the reel shaft RU1111 along with the rotation of the reel shaft RU1111 (reel RR), as shown by the arrow in the drawing, as shown by the arrow in the drawing. It is to be rotated along. The sensor unit RU112 is provided on the motor mounting plate RU11 such that a detection point RUP indicated by an asterisk on the circumference RUD is a detection position. That is, the sensor unit RU112 detects whether the detection piece RU1112 exists at the detection point RUP.

  With reference to FIG. 116, the relationship between the detection piece RU1112 and the detection state will be described. Hereinafter, it is assumed that the rotation of the reel RR is continued. First, in step SRU1, one end of the detection piece RU1112 reaches the detection point RUP (on-edge), and the detection of the detection piece RU1112 is started by the sensor unit RU112. At this time, the main control board MS detects the reference position (first reference position) of the reel RR by changing from the state where the detection piece RU1112 is not detected to the state where the detection piece RU1112 is detected. Thereafter, while the detection piece RU1112 continues to exist at the detection point RUP, the state where the detection piece RU1112 is detected by the sensor unit RU112 is continued (SRU2). Then, the other end of the detection piece RU1112 reaches the detection point RUP (off edge), and the detection of the detection piece RU1112 by the sensor unit RU112 is terminated (SRU3). At this time, the main control board MS detects the reference position (second reference position) of the reel RR by changing from the state where the detection piece RU1112 is detected to the state where it is not detected. That is, the detection piece RU1112 is continuously detected by the sensor unit RU112 until the position of the reel RR becomes the first reference position and then becomes the second reference position. Thereafter, the state in which the sensor RU112 does not detect the detection piece RU1112 continues until one end of the detection piece RU1112 reaches the detection point RUP again (SRU4).

  Thus, the first reference position and the second reference position are alternately detected each time the reel RR makes a half turn, and the position of the reel RR is specified based on the detected first reference position or the second reference position. Is done. Specifically, the main control board MS is supplied from the drive control board RU114 based on the control of the main control board MS with respect to the immediately preceding reference position (first reference position or second reference position). By adding a displacement corresponding to the number of drive pulses, the position of the reel RR is specified. As described above, the main control board MS determines whether the reel RR has reached the reference position (the first reference position or the second reference position) based on the detection of the detection piece RU1112 by the sensor unit RU112. Functions as a specific means. Further, the main control board MS and the drive control board RU114 function as reel position specifying means for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel RR from a reference position (first reference position or second reference position) due to rotation. I do.

  As described above, the detection piece RU1112 is formed in the shape of a figure surrounded by the arc-shaped outer periphery and the arc-shaped inner periphery, and the angle of the arc is set to 180 degrees. Therefore, the first reference position and the second reference position on the reel RR are opposed to each other on a straight line passing through the central axis of the reel RR with the central axis interposed therebetween.

  As described above, by detecting that the detection piece RU1112 has been detected by the sensor unit RU112 from the state in which the detection piece RU1112 is not detected by the sensor unit RU112, the first reference position of the reel RR is determined. Can be identified. In this manner, by detecting that the state where the detection piece RU1112 is detected by the sensor unit RU112 is changed to a state where the detection piece RU1112 is not detected by the sensor unit RU112, the second reference of the reel RR is detected. The position can be specified. In this way, it is possible to detect the reference position of the reel twice while the reel RR makes one rotation, and the same effect as when two sensors are provided can be obtained.

  In addition, on the circumferential path on which the sensing piece rotates, the area includes a region from a position corresponding to the first reference position to a position corresponding to the second reference position along the circumferential path, and corresponds to the second reference position. The shape of the detection piece is not limited as long as it has a shape that does not include an area extending from the position along the circumferential path to the position corresponding to the first reference position.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel unit RU: reel unit RU1: sensor unit RU112)
As shown in FIG. 117, the left side surface (reel mounting side surface) of the motor mounting plate RU11 is screw-fastened so that the sensor unit RU112 is placed on the bottom surface. The sensor unit RU112 has a sensor RU1121 and a pedestal member RU1122. The sensor RU1121 is a transmission-type sensor that detects a detection piece RU1112 that rotates along a predetermined circumference with the rotation of the reel RR. The sensor RU1121 is formed to have a concave cross section with the center depressed, and is provided such that the direction of the depression is orthogonal to the center axis of the reel shaft RU1111 of the reel index RU111. The sensor RU1121 is attached to the motor mounting plate RU11 via the base member RU1122 such that the edge of the rotation surface of the detection piece RU1112 of the reel index RU111 passes through the space inside the recess of the sensor RU1121.

  As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the pedestal member RU1122 has a pedestal base RU1122g having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction, and a pedestal column RU1122h protruding leftward from the center of the pedestal base RU1122g. I have. The pedestal base RU1122g has a shape obtained by extending a semicircle in the vertical direction of a rectangular flat plate. The pedestal base part RU1122g has screw holes RU1122a and RU1122b penetrating in the left-right direction at upper and lower positions. The pedestal base portion RU1122g has a rectangular shape, the front side of which is formed in a concave shape, and has a protruding portion RU1122j projecting rightward at the center of the concave side edge. The pedestal base RU1122g has a rectangular portion, the rear side of which is formed in a convex shape, and has a protruding portion RU1122k projecting rightward in a columnar shape at the center of the convex side edge.

  The pedestal column part RU1122h has a plane having a vertical direction at the left end, and has screw holes RU1122c and RU1122d at upper and lower positions of the plane. The pedestal column RU1122h has a plane at the left end protruding forward from the center in the vertical direction. The pedestal column part RU1122h has protrusions RU1122e and RU1122f that are arranged in the front-rear direction and are protruded leftward in a cylindrical shape at the protruding portion.

(Mounting of base member RU1122 to motor mounting plate RU11)
The motor mounting plate RU11 has fitting holes RU11e and RU11f formed at positions corresponding to the protrusions RU1122f and RU1122g on the base member RU1122. The protrusions RU1122j and RU1122k are inserted into the fitting holes RU11e and RU11f, respectively, so that the base member RU1122 is positioned with respect to the motor mounting plate RU11. In the motor mounting plate RU11, screw holes RU11c and RU11d are formed at positions corresponding to the screw holes RU1122a and RU1122b in the base member RU1122. The screw RU1124a is screwed into the screw hole RU1122a and the screw hole RU11c, and the screw RU1124b is screwed into the screw hole RU1122b and the screw hole RU11d from the pedestal member RU1122 to the right. The base member RU1122 is screwed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 120, the mounting position of the pedestal member RU1122 with respect to the motor mounting plate RU11 will be described. As shown in FIG. 120, in the motor mounting plate RU11, the screw holes RU11c and the screw holes RU11d are arranged on a straight line RUDA. A fitting hole RU11e and a fitting hole RU11f are arranged at two points on a straight line RUDB substantially perpendicular to the straight line RUDA. The fitting hole RU11e and the fitting hole RU11f are located on the opposite sides of the straight line RUDA. The straight line RUDB is a straight line passing through a center obtained by bisecting a line segment connecting the screw hole RU11c and the screw hole RU11d. Here, the fitting hole RU11f has a longitudinal direction in the direction of the straight line RUDB. Thereby, an error in the interval in molding the two positioning projections in the pedestal member RU1122 can be allowed. The longitudinal direction of the fitting hole RU11f is substantially perpendicular to the tangential direction of the rotation of the detection piece RU1112 at the detection position of the sensor RU1121. This makes it possible to prevent the sensor RU 1121 from erroneously detecting the reference position, even if the fitting hole RU 11f having a longitudinal direction is displaced from the pedestal member RU 1122.

(Attaching the sensor RU1121 to the base member RU1122)
The sensor RU1121 is engaged with a plane at the left end of the pedestal member RU1122, and has a plane substantially equal in shape to the plane at the left end of the pedestal member RU1122. That is, the plane located at the right end of the sensor RU 1121 has a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction, and protrudes forward from the central part in the vertical direction. The pedestal column part RU1122h is formed with fitting holes RU1124e and RU1124f that are juxtaposed in the front-rear direction at the projecting portion. Further, screw holes RU1121a and RU1121b penetrating in the left-right direction are opened at the upper and lower positions of the plane. The screw hole RU1121b is formed in a long hole shape having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction. The fitting holes RU1124e and RU1124f are provided at positions corresponding to the protruding portions RU1122e and RU1122f of the pedestal member RU1122, and the sensor RU1121 is positioned with respect to the pedestal member RU1122 by being inserted respectively. The sensor RU 1121 is configured such that the screw RU 1123a is screwed into the screw hole RU 1121a and the screw hole RU 1122c from the sensor RU 1121 side to the right, and the screw RU 1123b is screwed into the screw hole RU 1121b and the screw hole RU 1122d. The sensor RU1121 is screwed to the RU1122.

  Here, the mounting position of the sensor RU 1121 with respect to the base member RU 1122 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 121, in pedestal member RU1122, screw hole RU1122c and screw hole RU1122d are arranged on straight line RUDC. Then, a protrusion RU1122e and a protrusion RU1122f are disposed at two points on a straight line RUDD substantially perpendicular to the straight line RUDC. Further, the protrusion RU1122e and the protrusion RU1122f are located on the side where the sensor RU1121 detects the detection piece RU1112 with respect to the straight line RUDC. The straight line RUDD is a straight line passing through a center obtained by bisecting a line segment connecting the screw hole RU1122c and the screw hole RU1122d. Here, the screw hole RU1122b of the sensor RU1121 screwed together with the screw hole RU1122d has a longitudinal direction in the direction of the straight line RUDC. Thereby, an error in the interval in forming the two screwing locations in the sensor RU1121 can be allowed.

(Upper door mechanism DU)
As shown in FIG. 122, a cabinet G (corresponding to a housing) rotatably supports an upper door mechanism DU (corresponding to a door) at the left end. The upper door mechanism DU and the cabinet G are connected by an upper hinge mechanism UH. As shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, the upper hinge mechanism UH is a slide member UH1 attached to the left end of the upper door mechanism UD. And a shaft member UH2 attached to the left end of the upper space of the cabinet G.

  As shown in FIG. 124, the slide member UH1 has one plate bent at three places to form a groove UH11. In the groove UH11, a bearing mechanism UH12, a positioning portion UH14, an engagement convex portion UH15, a bearing mechanism UH13, and an engagement convex portion UH16 are provided from above (U direction).

  The bearing mechanisms UH12 and UH13 have a rectangular shape and are attached to the slide member UH1 by screws. At the bottom of the bearing mechanisms UH12 and UH13, there are formed bearing portions UH121 and UH131 which are overlapped and engaged with shaft portions UH21 and UH22 described later. The bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are opened in a substantially circular shape at the bottoms of the bearing mechanisms UH12 and UH13, and have a shape in which the oral cavity is reduced upward from the periphery of the opening. The direction in which the centers of the openings of the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 face upward along the groove UH11 is defined as an axis UH121A.

  The positioning portion UH14 has a curved shape such that the positioning portion UH14 comes into contact with a curved surface of a support portion UH25 of the shaft member UH2 to be described later, so that the shaft portion UH21 can be positioned with respect to the bearing portion UH121.

  The engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16 have a thin plate shape that protrudes horizontally from the groove UH11. The engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16 play a role of engaging with engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 described later.

  The shaft member UH2 is formed by bending a single plate. The shaft member UH2 includes, from above, a shaft portion UH21 protruding from the upper surface of the support portion UH25, a support portion UH25, an engagement recess UH23, a shaft portion UH22 protruding from the upper surface of the support portion UH26, and a support portion UH26. , An engagement recess UH24.

  The shaft portions UH21 and UH22 have a conical shape. The shaft portions UH21 and UH22 play a role of overlapping and engaging with the bearing portions UH121 and UH131.

  The support portions UH25 and UH26 are provided on the shaft member UH2, and the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 are provided on the upper surface. Further, the side surface of the support portion UH25 has a curved shape, and the shaft portion UH21 can be positioned with respect to the bearing portion UH121 by contacting the curved surface of the positioning portion UH14.

  The engagement plates UH27 and UH28 extending from the side surfaces of the support portions UH25 and UH26 are formed with engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 that are opened horizontally. The engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24 have a role of engaging with the engagement convex portions UH15 and UH16.

  By sliding the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 of the sliding member UH1 of the upper door mechanism DU onto the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 of the shaft member UH2 of the cabinet G so as to cover the shaft members UH21 and UH22 from above and below, they are engaged by overlapping and engaging. The upper door mechanism DU can be attached to the cabinet G. At this time, it is preferable that the upper door mechanism DU be mounted with the upper door mechanism DU opened at 90 ° with respect to the cabinet G so that the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 do not engage with the engaging concave portions UH23 and UH24.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16 protrude toward the cabinet G, but the protrusion height is such that the upper door mechanism DU is opened at 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G (FIG. 122) is the height at which the engagement of the engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16 with the engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 is released. Thereby, when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G, the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 of the slide member UH1 of the upper door mechanism DU are moved from the shaft portion UH21 of the shaft member UH2 of the cabinet G to the axis line. By sliding above the UH121A, the upper door mechanism DU can be slid upward and removed from the cabinet G in a state where the restriction on the engaging concave portions UH23 and UH24 of the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 is released. Becomes

  If the protrusion height of the engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16 is lower than that of the present embodiment, the upper door mechanism DU is formed at an angle smaller than 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G at an angle of less than 60 °. The restriction on the engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 can be released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be slid upward and removed from the cabinet G. On the other hand, if the height of the projections of the engagement projections UH15 and UH16 is made higher than that of the present embodiment, the upper door mechanism DU is set at an angle larger than 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G, and The restriction on the engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 can be released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be slid upward and removed from the cabinet G.

According to the above configuration, until the upper door mechanism DU opens at a predetermined angle (60 ° in the present embodiment) with respect to the cabinet G, the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 engage with the engaging concave portions UH23 and UH24. , Restricts the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 from sliding along the axis UH121A. Accordingly, the release of the overlap between the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 can be restricted, and the removal of the upper door mechanism DU from the cabinet G can be locked.
On the other hand, when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G, the engagement of the engagement convex portions UH15 and UH16 with the engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24 is released, and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 move to the axis UH121A. It can slide along. As a result, the overlap between the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 is released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G.
That is, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G only when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G.
Further, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G without opening the upper door mechanism DU to the open state (opening of 90 °).

  As shown in FIG. 125, the upper door mechanism UD includes a mechanism that emits light in the upper and left and right regions of the upper display window UD1 that transmits the image of the display unit A to the front. Specifically, a top panel mechanism HA disposed above the upper display window UD1, an upper left panel mechanism HB disposed in the upper left direction of the upper display window UD1, and an upper right disposed in the upper right direction of the upper display window UD1. A panel mechanism HC, a left lateral panel mechanism HD disposed at the upper left direction of the upper display window UD1, a right lateral panel mechanism HE disposed at the upper right direction of the upper display window UD1, and a left direction of the upper display window UD1. It has a left front panel mechanism HF arranged at the lower part, and a right front panel mechanism HG arranged at the right lower part of the upper display window UD1. Details of each of the panel mechanisms HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, and HG will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 126, a panel base HH that forms the framework of the upper door mechanism UD is provided. On the front side of the panel base HH, the above-described panel mechanisms HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, and HG are provided. On the other hand, on the back side of the panel base HH, an upper door key receiving member HK, an upper door hinge member HM, and a center frame HL are provided. The upper door key receiving member HK is screwed to the right side of the panel base HH. The upper door hinge member HM is screwed to the left side of the panel base HH. The center frame HL is arranged horizontally, and a right end and a left end are connected to lower ends of an upper door key receiving member HK and an upper door hinge member HM, respectively. The transparent panel UD11 is provided on the upper door key receiving member HK, the upper door hinge member HM, and the center frame HL. The transparent panel UD11 is attachable by screwing from behind.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Decoration unit HA1)
As shown in FIG. 127, the top panel mechanism HA has a decoration unit HA1 for decorating the upper part of the upper door mechanism UD while emitting light. The decoration unit HA1 forms a decoration protrusion protruding forward from the upper display window UD1. The decorative unit HA1 includes a seamless top lens light guide plate HA14 that diffuses light and uniformly emits light from the surface of the decorative convex portion. Accordingly, when a plurality of components are joined to form the light guide plate of the decorative unit HA1, the load is concentrated on the joint portion of the light guide pieces between the components, but the seamless lens is used in the top lens light guide plate HA14 having the seamless structure. If so, it is possible to avoid a situation where the load is concentrated on a part. As a result, the decorative projection formed by the decorative unit HA1 including the seamless top lens light guide plate HA14 has a large rigidity and strength as a whole, so that an external force is applied from a player or the like located in front of the gaming machine. Even if it is done, it is hard to cause deformation and breakage.

  The decoration unit HA1 has a rear end connected to the panel base HH substantially matching the width in the left-right direction of the upper door mechanism UD, and has a width in the left-right direction from both ends in the left-right direction of the panel base HH to the front end side. It is reduced and formed in a shape having a vertex at the center of the front end. That is, the decoration unit HA1 has a substantially isosceles triangular shape with the panel base HH side as the base.

  Thus, even if the bending moment increases as the decorative unit HA1 approaches the front end part away from the panel base HH, the decoration unit HA1 reduces the weight in the left-right direction on the front end side to reduce the rigidity and the weight. Strength has been increased. As a result, since the decoration unit HA1 has a large rigidity and strength in the front region, even when an external force is applied due to contact with a player located forward or the like, the decoration unit HA1 is unlikely to be deformed or damaged.

  The decoration unit HA1 has a top lens cover HA11, a top design sheet cover HA12, a design sheet HA13, a top lens light guide plate HA14, and a top lens light guide plate base HA15 arranged in this order from above. The decoration unit HA1 has a top lens left LED board HA17 and a top lens right LED board HA18. The top lens left LED board HA17 and the top lens right LED board HA18 are respectively disposed on the left and right sides of the rear end of the decoration unit HA1. The top lens left LED board HA17 and the top lens right LED board HA18 have a plurality of LEDs HA17a and HA18a at equal intervals in the left-right direction, and are installed so as to emit light forward from these LEDs HA17a and HA18a. .

  The top lens cover HA11 forms an upper wall of the decoration unit HA1, and is formed so as to transmit light. The top lens light guide plate HA14 is formed so as to take in the light from the top lens left LED board HA17 and the top lens right LED board HA18 from the rear end face and uniformly emit the light from the top face. A display is made on the top lens cover HA11 via the seat cover HA12. The top lens light guide plate base HA15 forms a lower surface wall of the decoration unit HA1, and is formed so as not to transmit light.

  The decoration unit HA1 forms a hollow portion with the top lens light guide plate base HA15 and the top lens cover HA11, and houses the top design sheet cover HA12, the design sheet HA13, and the top lens light guide plate HA14 in this hollow portion. Thus, the rigidity is increased in the form of a large second moment of area as compared with a case where the top lens light guide plate base HA15, the top lens cover HA11, the top lens light guide plate HA14, and the like are simply laminated and formed into a plate shape. .

  Further, an opening HA15a is formed in the top lens light guide plate base HA15. The opening HA15a is disposed so as to face an LED substrate HA411 in a top lens described later. The opening portion HA15a is provided with a top lens middle LED substrate hiding member HA16, which functions as a reflector of the top lens middle LED substrate HA411 and opens and closes the opening portion HA15a. Functions as a window. The top-height LED substrate hiding member HA16 may be formed so as to transmit a part of the light from the top-lens LED board HA411.

  As shown in FIG. 128, the decoration unit HA1 has a front region curved downward. This allows the decoration unit HA1 to visually recognize the design by transmitting light to the upper front side and the front side of the upper door mechanism UD. The lower surface of the top lens light guide plate HA14 is a reflector that reflects light. As a result, when the light from the top lens left LED board HA17 and the top lens right LED board HA18 travels in the downwardly curved front area, a part of the light is reflected by the reflector on the back face. Can be changed obliquely downward on the front side.

  An irradiation light device B is arranged behind the decoration unit HA1. Here, behind the decoration unit HA1, the decoration unit HA1 protrudes forward, so a large space is secured by the amount of the protrusion. Thereby, the decoration unit HA1 can expand the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the mirrors with respect to the irradiation light device B of the light reflection type using the mirrors provided in a large space. Furthermore, since the decoration unit HA1 has high rigidity and strength, it is possible to sufficiently protect the irradiation light device B.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the top lens cover HA11 in the decoration unit HA1 is supported by a decoration unit support mechanism HI in which a front region curved downward is horizontally arranged. The decorative unit support mechanism HI includes a horizontal protruding portion HA11a horizontally protruding rearward from the rear surface of the top lens cover HA11, a horizontal protruding portion HH1 horizontally protruding forward from the front surface of the panel base HH, and a horizontal protruding portion. It has a plurality of sets of connecting screws HH2 in which the portions HA11a and HH1 are screwed to each other in the left-right direction.

  As a result, the decoration unit HA1 has the back surface of the front region curved downward and connected to the panel base HH via the horizontally arranged decoration unit support mechanism HI. It is in a state of being supported horizontally by the HI. Therefore, the decoration unit HA1 has a structure in which the front region has large rigidity and strength in the front-rear direction.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Left end light emitting mechanism HA2, right end light emitting mechanism HA3) As shown in FIG. 130, the top panel mechanism HA causes the left end area of the upper door mechanism UD to emit light in a planar manner. HA2 and a right end light emitting mechanism HA3 for emitting light in a plane at the right end area of the upper door mechanism UD. More specifically, the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 is disposed on the left rear side of the upper left speaker device UD2. The left end light emitting mechanism HA2 has a left LED substrate HA21. The left LED substrate HA21 is set so that the substrate surface faces forward. On the substrate surface of the left LED substrate HA21, two LEDHAs 22 are arranged. These LEDHAs 22 are set so as to emit light in the normal direction of the substrate surface, and emit light with a light intensity of a predetermined level or more in a left area (left end area of the upper door mechanism UD) of the upper left speaker device UD2. It has become.

  On the other hand, the right end light emitting mechanism HA3 is disposed on the right rear side of the upper right speaker device UD3. The right end light emitting mechanism HA3 has a right LED substrate HA31. The right LED substrate HA31 is set so that the substrate surface faces the front side. Two LEDHAs 32 are arranged on the substrate surface of the right LED substrate HA31. These LEDHAs 32 are set so as to emit light in the normal direction of the substrate surface, and emit light in a right area (right end area of the upper door mechanism UD) of the upper right speaker device UD3 with a light intensity higher than a predetermined value. It has become.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4)
The top panel mechanism HA further has a central light emitting mechanism HA4. The center light emitting mechanism HA4 is arranged on the center side of the upper door mechanism UD between the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 and the right end light emitting mechanism HA3. The center light emitting mechanism HA4 is configured to emit light in a region where it is difficult for the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 and the right end light emitting mechanism HA3 to emit light at a predetermined light intensity or more.

  More specifically, the central light emitting mechanism HA4 includes a first lighting mechanism HA41 that emits light in a left peripheral area on the left end area side and a right peripheral area on the right end area side, and a second lighting mechanism that emits light in a front end of the decorative unit HA1. HA42 and a third illuminating mechanism HA43 for emitting light from the lower side of the decorative unit HA1. In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the first illumination mechanism HA41 emits light in both the left peripheral region on the left end region side and the right peripheral region on the right end region side will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first illumination mechanism HA41 may be configured to emit light in at least one of the left peripheral region on the left end region side and the right peripheral region on the right end region side.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4: First lighting mechanism HA41)
As also shown in FIG. 131, the first illumination mechanism HA41 has an LED substrate HA411 in the top lens which is arranged below the substantially central portion of the decoration unit HA1. The center light emitting mechanism HA4 guides the light emitted from the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens to the left peripheral area and the right peripheral area by the light guiding mechanism, so that the light is hardly guided by the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 and the right end light emitting mechanism HA3. Also in the region, it is configured to be able to emit light with a light intensity higher than a predetermined value. That is, the first illuminating mechanism HA41 is provided with a plurality of upper light sources LEDHA4111 provided on the upper surface of the top lens LED substrate HA411, and a top lens inside the top lens disposed to cover the lower surface and side surfaces of the top lens LED substrate HA411. And a reflector HA412. The top surface of the top lens LED board HA411 is covered by a top lens LED board hiding member HA16 of the decoration unit HA1 of FIG. 127, and the top lens LED board hiding member HA16 reflects the light of the LEDHA4111. Functioning as

  A light-transmitting left light-guiding lens HA413 and a light-transmitting right light-guiding lens are provided on the upper surface of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens to guide the light from the LEDHA4111 to the left and right upper light-guiding regions to emit light in a planar manner. An upper light guide mechanism having a configuration in which the HA 414 and the HA 414 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the LED substrate HA 411 in the top lens is provided. Specifically, on the upper surface of the left end of the LED substrate HA 411 in the top lens, the right end of the horizontally arranged left light guide lens HA 413 is arranged, and the light of the LED HA 4111 can be incident from the end of the right end. Have been. The left light guide lens HA413 has a left end located above the upper left speaker device UD2, and emits light upward from the middle to the left end, so that an upper light guide from the left end region of the upper door mechanism UD to the center. The area is made to emit light. That is, the left light guide lens HA413 emits light in the upper light guide area HA5a (see FIG. 125) in the upper left rear end area of the top panel mechanism HA.

  On the other hand, on the upper surface of the right end of the LED substrate HA 411 in the top lens, the left end of the horizontally arranged right light guide lens HA 414 is arranged, and light from the LED HA 4111 can be incident from the end of the left end. The right light guide lens HA414 has a right end located above the upper right speaker device UD3, and emits light upward from the center to the right end, thereby forming a region (upper side) from the right end region of the upper door mechanism UD to the center. (A light guide region). That is, the right light guide lens HA414 emits light in the upper light guide area HA5b (see FIG. 125) in the upper right rear end area of the top panel mechanism HA.

  As shown in FIG. 132, the lower surface of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens is provided with a lower light guide mechanism that guides light from the lower light source to the lower light guide region and emits light in a planar manner. . More specifically, a plurality of LEDHAs 4112 serving as lower light sources are provided on the lower surface of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens. On the lower surface of the right end of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens, the left end of a translucent right downlight lens HA415 that is horizontally arranged is arranged. Light from the LEDHA4112 can be made incident from the end surface of the left end. I have. The right downlight lens HA415 has a right end positioned above the upper right speaker device UD3, and emits light downward from the middle to the right end, thereby lowering the center of the upper door mechanism UD from the left end region to the lower side of the center. The light region emits light. That is, the right downlight lens HA415 illuminates the area around the lower light guide area HA5d (see FIG. 125), which is the area in front of the upper right speaker device UD3 of the panel base HH, and surrounds the lower light guide area HA5d that is non-translucent. When the member functions as a reflector, light is emitted. The lower light guide mechanism includes a left downlight lens (not shown) having the same configuration as the right downlight lens HA415. The left downlight lens and the right downlight lens HA415 are arranged symmetrically about the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens. That is, the left downlight lens irradiates the area around the lower light guide area HA5c (see FIG. 125), which is the area in front of the upper left speaker device UD2 of the panel base HH, and the area around the lower light guide area HA5d that is non-translucent. Light is emitted when the member functions as a reflector.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4: Second lighting mechanism HA42)
As shown in FIG. 131, the second illumination mechanism HA42 has an LED substrate HA421 on the center lens disposed below the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens. On the upper surface of the center lens upper LEDHA 421, a plurality of LEDHAs 4211 are provided. The lower surface of the LEDHA4211 is covered with a central lens reflector HA422.

  As shown in FIG. 133, the upper surface of the center lens upper LED substrate HA421 is covered with the top lens light guide plate base HA15. In addition, a translucent center lens A423 is disposed below the center lens upper LED substrate HA421. The center lens A423 is provided such that the upper end thereof exposes the center lens upper LED substrate HA421 from the gap between the top lens light guide plate base HA15 and the panel base HH, and receives light of the LEDHA4211 from the end face of the upper end, The light is emitted from the lower end surface formed and arranged along the lower end of the top lens light guide plate base HA15.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4: Third lighting mechanism HA43)
The third illuminating mechanism HA43 has a lower center LED board HA431 arranged on the rear side of the center lens upper LED board HA421. The lower center LED substrate HA431 is provided such that the normal direction of the front surface substantially matches the front direction. On the front surface of the lower center LED substrate HA431, a plurality of LEDs HA4311 are provided. In front of the lower center LED substrate HA431, a translucent lower lens HA432 is arranged. The lower center lens HA432 is provided below the panel base HH, and emits light of the LEDHA 4311 in the lower area of the decoration unit HA1. That is, the lower center lens HA 432 has an uneven surface decoration (not shown) on the inner wall surface, and the irradiation light from the LED HA 4311 is diffusely reflected and irregularly refracted and radiated to the outside. Therefore, the lower center lens HA432 irradiates the periphery of the lower area HA5e (see FIG. 125) around the lower center lens HA432, and emits non-light-transmitting light.

  The member functioning as the above-described reflector is preferably colored with a high-brightness color such as white or a metallic color in order to increase the reflectance.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Left horizontal panel mechanism HD, right horizontal panel mechanism HE, left front panel mechanism HF, right front panel mechanism HG)
Hereinafter, a mechanism integrating the left horizontal panel mechanism HD and the left front panel mechanism HF will be described as a left panel mechanism HJ, and a mechanism integrating the right horizontal panel mechanism HE and the right front panel mechanism HG will be described as a right panel mechanism HK. The left panel mechanism HJ and the right panel mechanism HK function as light emitting units arranged on the side of the front surface of the screen mechanism D as an effect device. Since the left panel mechanism HJ and the right panel mechanism K are symmetrical with respect to each other with the screen mechanism D interposed therebetween, only the left panel mechanism HJ will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the left panel mechanism HJ includes a partition mechanism HJ2 functioning as a partition member, an upper left side lens HJ3 functioning as a side translucent member, and a lower left lens HJ4 functioning as a front translucent member. , An inner light guide member HJ5. The left panel mechanism HJ has a left LED substrate HJ1 as a light source device to be described later, and light from the left LED substrate HJ1 is emitted outside from the upper left side lens HJ3, the lower left lens HJ4, and the left light guide plate HJ5. It is configured to be.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, the left panel mechanism HJ includes an upper left side lens HJ3, a lower left lens HJ4, a partition plate HJ21 and a left LED board case HJ22 functioning as a partition mechanism HJ2, and a left LED. It has a substrate HJ1, a left light guide plate HJ51 functioning as an inner light guide member HJ5, and a left LED board cover HJ52.

  The left LED substrate HJ1 is set so that the normal direction of the substrate surface substantially matches the front direction. Four LEDHJ11 and six LEDHJ12 are arranged on the front surface of the left LED substrate HJ1. These LEDHJ11 and LEDHJ12 are set to emit light in the normal direction (forward direction) of the substrate surface. In addition, six LEDHJ13s are arranged on the surface of the left LED substrate HJ1 opposite to the surface on which the LEDHJ11 and LEDHJ12 are arranged. These LEDs HJ13 are set to emit light in the normal direction (backward direction) of the substrate surface.

  The left LED substrate HJ1 is formed in a flat plate shape having a longitudinal direction in the up-down direction, and the upper end region is formed wide in the right direction. The LEDs HJ12 are arranged in a row substantially uniformly along the left edge in the longitudinal direction from the upper end to the center. In the LEDHJ11, two sets are arranged in a line on a straight line inclined from the center to the lower left end with a wider interval than the set. The LEDs HJ13 are arranged in a line substantially uniformly from the upper end to the lower end of the central region along the right edge of the surface opposite to the LEDHJ11 and the LEDHJ12.

  The left LED board case HJ22 is a case that houses the left LED board HJ1 formed in the same shape as the left LED board HJ1 when viewed from the front from the front side. In the left LED board case HJ22, through holes HJ221 for passing light in the forward direction from the LED HJ11 are formed at positions corresponding to the respective LED HJ11. Further, in the left LED substrate case HJ22, through holes HJ222 for passing light in the forward direction from the LED HJ12 are formed at positions corresponding to the respective LED HJ12. That is, four through holes HJ221 are arranged on a straight line, and six through holes HJ222 are arranged on a straight line. The plane region HJ22a in which the four through holes HJ221 are formed and the plane region HJ22b in which the six through holes HJ222 are formed are formed by a bent line extending from the center left end to the upper end of the surface of the left LED board case HJ22. Are classified. The plane region HJ22a is set higher in the forward direction than the plane region HJ22b, and a step HJ22c is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 138, the partition plate HJ21 has a mountain shape having a vertex at a front end in a side view. Specifically, the partition plate HJ21 is formed in a substantially pyramid shape with the plane region HJ22b as a bottom surface. The partition plate HJ21 has an open bottom surface on the side of the planar region HJ22b and a left side surface. The upper wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 is formed so as to reach the vertex with a downward slope while the width in the left-right direction is reduced forward from the upper edge of the planar region HJ22b. The right wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 is formed so as to reach the top with a slant leftward while the width in the vertical direction is reduced forward. Thus, the right wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 is formed to extend from the step HJ22c. That is, the partition plate HJ21 and the step HJ22c can separate the light emitted from the left LED substrate HJ1 in the forward direction into the LEDHJ11 and the LEDHJ12.

  The upper left side lens HJ3 is formed in a substantially triangular flat plate whose peripheral shape substantially coincides with the open left side surface of the partition plate HJ21. That is, the partition plate HJ21, the upper left side lens HJ3, and the left LED substrate HJ1 form an internal space HJ23 to which light is emitted from the LED HJ12. The upper left side lens HJ3 is formed of a material that can transmit light, and forms a part of the left side surface of the housing 2.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the right wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 exists in front of the LED HJ12. Therefore, part of the light emitted from the LED HJ12 is reflected by the partition plate HJ21. Since the right wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 has an inclination, the light is reflected to light having at least a leftward component. Thus, the light reflected by the partition plate HJ21 reaches the upper left side lens HJ3. The upper left lens HJ3 is decorated such that the inner wall surface has a matrix of square pyramids having vertices inside. As a result, the light that has reached the upper left side lens HJ3 is irregularly refracted and transmitted outside. As described above, the partition mechanism HJ2 having the partition plate HJ21 and the step HJ22c can divide the light in the forward direction into two, and can guide the light that has been divided in one side direction. Further, the upper left side lens HJ3 can transmit one of the lights guided by the partition structure HJ2. The partition plate HJ21 is preferably white for increasing the reflectance, but is not limited to this.

  The lower left lens HJ4 is disposed in front of the left LED board case HJ22 so as to form an internal space HJ41 with the plane area HJ22a of the left LED board case HJ22. The lower left lens HJ4 is formed of a translucent material, and forms a part of the left side surface of the housing 2.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the front wall surface of the lower left lens HJ4 exists in the front direction of the LED HJ11. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED HJ11 reaches the lower left lens HJ4. The lower left lens HJ4 has a decoration in which the inner wall surface has a zigzag cross section in a side view. As a result, the light that has reached the lower left lens HJ4 is irregularly refracted and transmitted outside. As described above, the lower left lens HJ4 can transmit the light separated into the other by the partition structure HJ2. The decorative structure of the inner wall surface of the upper left lens HJ3 and the lower left lens HJ4 is not limited to this, but may be any as long as the incident light is diffused and emitted to the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 140, the left light guide plate HJ51 has a light incident portion HJ511, an optical path portion HJ512, and a light emitting portion HJ513. The left light guide plate HJ51 is formed of a translucent material. The light incident portion HJ511 is formed in a flat plate shape having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction. The light incident portion HJ511 has depressions at two upper and lower portions, and has a protrusion HJ511a having a convex cross section extending in the vertical direction at the center of each of the depressions in the left-right direction. The light incident portion HJ511 has a through hole HJ511b extending adjacent to the left side of the protruding portion HJ511a. The left LED board cover HJ52 has a shape that engages with the rear side surface of the light incident portion HJ511 of the left light guide plate HJ51. The left LED board cover HJ52 has a protruding portion HJ52a having a convex cross section extending in the vertical direction at the center in the left-right direction, and is fitted into the through hole HJ511b. The left LED board cover HJ52 is formed of a non-translucent material.

  The protruding portion HJ511a is provided to face the LEDHJ13 arranged on the left LED substrate HJ1. Light from the LED HJ13 enters from the front side of the protrusion HJ511a. The left light guide plate HJ51 has an inclined surface HJ511c in which the incident surface is inclined approximately 45 degrees to the right in the traveling direction of the incident light to the protrusion HJ511a. Since the inclined surface HJ511c is disposed so as to be in contact with the left LED board cover HJ52, the light incident on the protrusion HJ511a travels rightward after being reflected by the inclined surface HJ511c. The light traveling rightward passes through the optical path section HJ512 and reaches the light emitting section HJ513. The optical path portion HJ512 is formed so as to be bent backward from the right end of the light incident portion HJ511. The optical path portion HJ512 is set so that the normal direction is the right front direction. The light emitting section HJ513 is formed to be bent from the right end of the optical path section HJ512. The light emitting unit HJ513 is set so that the normal direction is the front right direction. Further, the light emitting portion HJ513 is decorated with a zigzag cross section in front view at the right end. As a result, the light that has reached the right end of the light emitting unit HJ513 is irregularly refracted, and is applied to the front surface of the screen mechanism D and the like.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Upper left panel mechanism HB, upper right panel mechanism HC)
Hereinafter, since the upper left panel mechanism HB and the upper right panel mechanism HC are symmetrical with respect to each other with respect to the left and right sides, only the upper left panel mechanism HB will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 141, the upper left panel mechanism HB is fitted into a substantially triangular gap formed between the upper left end of the panel base HH and the left rear end of the top lens cover HA11 of the top panel mechanism HA. Placed in The upper left panel mechanism HB has a substantially right triangular shape having a right angle to the left front corner when viewed from above, and has an upper surface HB1 whose width in the left-right direction is increased from the rear end to the front end. A tight screw HH4 can be screwed into the upper left end of the panel base HH from behind. The tight screw HH4 projects to the front of the panel base HH, and can be fitted to the upper left panel mechanism HB.

  As shown in FIG. 142, the upper left panel mechanism HB has a fitting portion HB11 at the rear end, and the tight screw HH4 is fitted. In addition, the upper left panel mechanism HB has a frame portion HB2 formed so as to be lowered downward from the left front end. The frame portion HB2 has a regulating portion HB21 at the lower end portion, which projects rearward and is bent downward. When the upper left panel mechanism HB is attached to the panel base HH, the restricting portion HB21 extends to a position behind the fitting portion HH3 of the panel base HH engaged with the frame portion HB2. That is, since the restricting portion HB21 is located at a position behind the fitting portion HH3, the movement in the forward direction is restricted. The frame portion HB2 is decorated such that the inner wall surfaces are arranged in a triangular pyramid shape protruding inward, so that light from a light source from behind can be irregularly refracted.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the upper left panel mechanism HB has locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14. The locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14 are arranged at a position adjacent to the top lens cover HA11 on the front side of the fitting portion HH3, in a direction different from the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11, and from the placement portion to the top lens cover HA11. It is formed so as to protrude in the direction toward it. Specifically, the locking piece HB12 is located in the rear end region of the right edge of the fitting portion HB11, and protrudes rightward substantially perpendicular to the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11. The locking piece HB13 is located substantially at the center of the right edge of the fitting portion HB11, and protrudes right rearward at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11. The locking piece HB14 is located at the front end of the right edge of the fitting portion HB11, and protrudes rightward substantially perpendicular to the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11. The locking pieces HB12, HB13, HB14 protrude from a position lower than the outer surface of the upper surface HB1.

  On the other hand, the top lens cover HA11 is formed with cutouts HA111, HA112, and HA113 that are engaged with the locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14. The cutout portions HA111, HA112, and HA113 are cutouts formed on the inner wall surface of the top lens cover HA11. The notch portions HA111, HA112, and HA113 are engaged with the top lens cover HA11 in a state where the locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14 are engaged, and tight screws HH4 are fitted to the fitting portions HB11 via the panel base HH. By the combination, the movement of the upper left panel mechanism HB in the horizontal direction is restricted by the panel base HH and the top lens cover HA11. Further, the forward movement of the upper left panel mechanism HB is regulated by the regulating portion HB21.

The gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention has been described above. The gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment has the following features.
(1-1) a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2);
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes:
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
With respect to a pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) formed on the arm (crank member E22), a power source is provided via a pin (slide member E26) movable inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b). (Crank gear E21) for transmitting a driving force generated from the (drive motor E25).
The arm (crank member E22) moves through the pin (slide member E26) through the pin (slide member E26) when the pin (slide member E26) moves inside the pin receiver (slide groove E22b). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) operates at the first position (front standby) in conjunction with the operation of the arm (crank member E22) while the operation is performed in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to E22b). Position) and a second position (front exposure position).
The pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) is used when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) starts operating from the first position (front standby position) toward the second position (front exposure position). No driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26), and the display means (front screen mechanism E1) moves from the second position (front exposure position) to the When the operation is started toward the first position (front standby position), it is formed along a direction in which driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26). I have.

(1-2) a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2);
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes:
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
A motor (slide member E26) that can slide inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) with respect to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22). A gear (crank gear E21) for transmitting a driving force generated from the driving motor E25).
The arm (crank member E22) slides through the slide groove (slide member E26) through the slide member (slide member E26) when the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) operates in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to the groove E22b), and the display means (front screen mechanism E1) operates in the first position (front) in association with the operation of the arm (crank member E22). Operate between a standby position) and a second position (front exposure position),
The slide groove (slide groove E22b) is at the time when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) starts operating from the first position (front standby position) to the second position (front exposure position). The movement direction of the slide member (slide member E26) and the operation of the display means (front screen mechanism E1) from the second position (front exposure position) to the first position (front standby position). A groove wall surface (groove wall surface E22b1) is formed so as to be substantially parallel to the moving direction of the slide member (slide member E26) at the time of starting.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the slide groove E22b is used to control the movement direction of the slide member E26 when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operating from the front standby position toward the front exposure position, and the front screen. The groove wall surface E22b1 is formed so as to be substantially parallel to the moving direction of the slide member E26 when the mechanism E1 starts operating from the front exposure position to the front standby position. Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operating from the front standby position toward the front exposure position, no driving force is transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member E26, and the front screen mechanism E1 moves from the front exposure position to the front exposure position. When the operation is started toward the standby position, the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member.

  Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operating from the front standby position to the front exposure position, and when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operating from the front exposure position to the front standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 is activated. Can be moderated. This makes it possible to smoothly drive the front screen mechanism E1 and reduce the load on the front screen mechanism E1 and the drive motor E25. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front screen mechanism E1 and the drive motor E25 from being damaged. In addition, since the driving of the front screen mechanism E1 can be smoothly performed without devising the output of the pulse, there is no need to perform complicated excitation control, and the control load related to the driving of the front screen mechanism E1 is reduced. be able to.

  In addition, when the excitation control needs to be performed in order to smoothly drive the front screen mechanism E1, when the size of the front screen mechanism E1 is changed, it is necessary to change the design of the excitation control. It takes time. In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment can smoothly drive the front screen mechanism E1 without performing the excitation control. It is possible to easily cope with a change in specifications such as the size of the screen mechanism E1.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operating from the front standby position toward the front exposure position, the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member E26, and the front screen mechanism E1 is moved forward. It has been described that the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member when the operation is started from the exposure position toward the front standby position. That is, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operating from the front standby position toward the front exposure position, and when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operating from the front exposure position toward the front standby position, the slide is performed. It has been described that the driving force is not transmitted to the groove E22b. However, in the present invention, when the front screen mechanism starts operating from the front standby position toward the front exposure position, and when the front screen mechanism starts operating from the front exposure position toward the front standby position, And the driving force may not be transmitted to the slide groove.

  Here, the position of the pin (relative position with respect to the pin receiving portion) when the display means is at the first position is referred to as a first predetermined position, and when the display means is at the second position. The position of the pin (relative position with respect to the pin receiving portion) is referred to as a second predetermined position. In this case, the first predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is the moving direction of the pin at the time when the display means starts operating from the first position to the second position (actually regardless of the pin receiving portion, The direction in which the display means starts moving from the second position to the first position is the second predetermined position in the pin receiving portion. (The direction in which the pins actually move, irrespective of the pin receiving portion) may be formed. The first predetermined position and the second predetermined position may be the same position or different positions.

  Further, the driving force transmission mechanism includes a driving force transmission body (for example, a gear) that rotates around a first straight line according to the driving force generated from the power source, and the pin is fixed to the driving force transmission body. May be. The first predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is formed in a direction perpendicular to the pin at the first predetermined position and a straight line connecting the intersection (for example, the center of the gear) between the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body. The second predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is a direction perpendicular to a pin at the second predetermined position and a straight line connecting the intersection (for example, the center of the gear) of the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body. May be formed.

  Accordingly, the direction of the first predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is the direction in which the pin is to move when the display means starts operating from the first position to the second position (concentric with the driving force transmitting body). Tangent direction of a circle whose radius is the distance between the center of the driving force transmitting body and the pin at the first predetermined position), and the second predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is determined by the display means. The direction in which the pin is to move when starting the operation from the position to the first position (a circle that is concentric with the driving force transmitting body, the center of the driving force transmitting body and the pin at the second predetermined position are (Tangential direction of a circle whose radius is the distance of the circle). Therefore, when the display means starts operating from the first position to the second position, no driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin, and the display means moves from the second position to the first position. No driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin when the operation is started toward. Thus, when the display means is near the first position and the second position, the operation of the display means can be moderated.

  The object driven by the driving mechanism is not particularly limited, and the driving mechanism may be the following driving mechanism.

A driving mechanism for driving the movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body,
A driving force transmission mechanism for transmitting a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed on the arm via a pin movable inside the pin receiving portion,
The arm operates in conjunction with the driving force being transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin by the pin moving inside the pin receiving portion, while the movable body is Operate between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the operation of the arm,
The driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin when the movable body starts operating from the first position toward the second position, and Are formed along a direction in which driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin when the operation is started from the second position toward the first position,
A driving mechanism characterized by the above.

A driving mechanism for driving the movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body,
A driving force transmission mechanism for transmitting a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed on the arm via a pin movable inside the pin receiving portion,
The arm operates in conjunction with the driving force being transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin by the pin moving inside the pin receiving portion, while the movable body is Operate between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the operation of the arm,
The moving direction of the pin at the time when the movable body starts operating from the first position to the second position, and 1 is formed along the moving direction of the pin at the time of starting the operation toward the position of 1.
A driving mechanism characterized by the above.

(2-1) a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2);
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes:
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
With respect to a pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) formed on the arm (crank member E22), a power source is provided via a pin (slide member E26) movable inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b). A driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from the driving motor E25.
The driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21) rotates around a first straight line as an axis in accordance with a driving force generated from a power source (drive motor E25),
The pin (slide member E26) is fixed to the driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21).
The arm (crank member E22) is configured such that the pin (slide member E26) moves inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) with rotation of the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) rotates while the driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via a pin (slide member E26). In association with the rotation of the member E22), the member E22 rotates between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position),
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21). The direction of the straight line (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b) connecting the intersection with the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position). In such a case, a force for rotating the display means (front screen mechanism E1) without depending on the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25) is applied to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank). Direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22),
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21). The direction of the straight line (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b) connecting the intersection with the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposed position). In such a case, a force for rotating the display means (front screen mechanism E1) without depending on the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25) is applied to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank). The direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member (E22).

(2-2) a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2);
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes:
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
A motor (slide member E26) that can slide inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) with respect to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22). A gear (crank gear E21) for transmitting a driving force generated from the driving motor E25).
The gear (crank gear E21) rotates according to the driving force generated by the motor (drive motor E25),
The slide member (slide member E26) is fixed to the gear (crank gear E21).
The arm (crank member E22) is configured such that the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) with the rotation of the gear (crank gear E21). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) rotates while the driving force is transmitted to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via the (slide member E26). ), Rotates between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position) in conjunction with the rotation of
When the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position) and when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position). A straight line connecting the rotation center of the gear (crank gear E21) and the slide member (slide member E26) (a straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b), and the arm (crank member E22). ) And a straight line connecting the slide member (slide member E26) (a straight line connecting the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21) is substantially orthogonal.

(3-1) a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving a display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2);
A housing section (screen casing C10) for housing the drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) therein;
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes:
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
With respect to a pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) formed on the arm (crank member E22), a power source is provided via a pin (slide member E26) movable inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b). A driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from the driving motor E25.
The driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21) rotates around a first straight line as an axis in accordance with a driving force generated from a power source (drive motor E25),
The pin (slide member E26) is fixed to the driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21).
The arm (crank member E22) is configured such that the pin (slide member E26) moves inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) with rotation of the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) rotates while the driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via a pin (slide member E26). In association with the rotation of the member E22), the member E22 rotates between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position),
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21). The direction of the straight line (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b) connecting the intersection with the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position). In such a case, a force for rotating the display means (front screen mechanism E1) without depending on the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25) is applied to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank). Direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22),
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21). The direction of the straight line (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b) connecting the intersection with the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposed position). In this case, a force for rotating the display means (front screen mechanism E1) without depending on the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25) is applied to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank). Direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22),
The housing (screen casing C10) has openings (operation openings C21 and C31) at positions where the driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21) can be manually rotated.

(III-2) a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving a display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2);
A drive mechanism housing (screen housing C10) that houses the drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) therein;
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the drive mechanism housing (screen housing C10);
Opening and closing doors (upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD) attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable,
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes:
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
A motor (slide member E26) that can slide inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) with respect to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22). A gear (crank gear E21) for transmitting a driving force generated from the driving motor E25).
The gear (crank gear E21) rotates according to the driving force generated by the motor (drive motor E25),
The slide member (slide member E26) is fixed to the gear (crank gear E21).
The arm (crank member E22) is configured such that the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) with the rotation of the gear (crank gear E21). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) rotates while the driving force is transmitted to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via the (slide member E26). ), Rotates between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position) in conjunction with the rotation of
When the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position) and when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position). A straight line connecting the rotation center of the gear (crank gear E21) and the slide member (slide member E26) (a straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b), and the arm (crank member E22). ) And a straight line connecting the slide member (slide member E26) (a straight line connecting the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21) are substantially orthogonal to each other;
The drive mechanism housing (screen housing C10) has openings (operation openings C21 and C31) at positions where the gear (crank gear E21) can be manually rotated.

(3-3) The opening (operation openings C21 and C31) is a first opening (operation opening) provided on one side surface (right side plate C2) of the drive mechanism housing (screen housing C10). An opening C21) and a second opening (operation) provided on a side surface (left side plate C3) of the side surface of the drive mechanism housing (screen case C10) opposite to the one side surface (right side plate C2). Opening C31).
The first opening (operation opening C21) and the second opening (operation opening C31) are formed in substantially the same size and substantially the same shape.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position and when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position, the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is eccentric. A straight line connecting the position E21b and a straight line connecting the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21 are substantially orthogonal to each other.

  Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position or the front exposure position, the force for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 (manually) regardless of the driving force generated from the driving motor E25 is applied to the front screen. When applied to the mechanism E1 or the crank member E22, the direction of the force applied to the slide member E26 coincides with the direction of a straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. Therefore, the force applied to the slide member E26 is not converted into the force for rotating the crank gear E21 (the direction in which the force acts is from the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21). Any deviation is converted to a force for rotating the crank gear E21). Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position or the front exposure position, even if the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated by manually moving the front screen mechanism E1 or the crank member E22, the front screen mechanism E1 is not rotated. Does not rotate. As a result, it is possible to prevent a person handling the front screen mechanism E1 from directly touching the front screen mechanism E1 and forcibly moving the front screen mechanism E1.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, in realizing that the front screen mechanism E1 is not manually rotated when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position or the front exposure position, There is no need to separately add a member or the like for locking the rotation of the front screen mechanism E1, and it is possible to prevent an increase in cost.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the front screen driving mechanism E2 is housed inside the screen housing C10, and the screen housing C10 manually rotates the crank gear E21. Operation openings C21 and C31 are provided at positions where operation is possible. Therefore, a person who handles the front screen mechanism E1 can rotate the front screen mechanism E1 by manually rotating the crank gear E21 from the operation openings C21 and C31. Therefore, although the front screen mechanism E1 cannot be rotated by directly touching the front screen mechanism E1, the convenience is reduced because the means for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 is separately secured. Can be prevented. In addition, when the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated through manually rotating the crank gear E21, the front screen mechanism E1 is not directly touched. The possibility that the screen mechanism E1 is damaged can be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the screen housing C10 is provided with openings (operation openings C21 and C31) having substantially the same size and substantially the same shape on the pair of side surfaces. The screen housing C10 can be carried by hooking hands on the two openings. As described above, the operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, by manually rotating the crank gear E21 from the opening as the handle, The front screen mechanism E1 can be rotated.

  In the embodiment described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position or the front exposure position, the force for manually rotating the front screen mechanism E1 regardless of the driving force generated from the drive motor E25. Is applied to the front screen mechanism E1 or the crank member E22, the direction of the force applied to the slide member E26 coincides with the direction of a straight line connecting the rotational center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. It was explained as. That is, it has been described that the front screen mechanism E1 does not manually rotate (is locked) both when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position and when it is at the front exposure position. However, in the present invention, the front screen mechanism may not be manually rotated (locked) only in one of the case where the front screen mechanism is at the front standby position and the case where the front screen mechanism is at the front exposure position. .

  The object driven by the driving mechanism is not particularly limited, and the driving mechanism may be the following driving mechanism.

A driving mechanism for driving the movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body,
A driving force transmitting body for transmitting a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed on the arm via a pin movable inside the pin receiving portion,
The driving force transmitting body rotates around a first straight line according to a driving force generated from a power source,
The pin is fixed to the driving force transmitting body,
The arm moves in conjunction with the driving force being transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin by the pin moving inside the pin receiving portion with the rotation of the driving force transmitting body. While rotating, the movable body rotates between a first position and a second position in conjunction with the rotation of the arm,
The direction of the pin when the movable body is at the first position and the direction of a straight line connecting the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body is such that the movable body is at the first position. In the case, the direction of the force applied to the pin when a force for rotating the movable body is applied to the movable body or the arm without depending on the driving force generated from the power source,
The direction of the pin when the movable body is at the second position and the direction of a straight line connecting the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body is such that the movable body is at the second position. In the case, a direction of a force applied to the pin when a force for rotating the movable body is applied to the movable body or the arm without depending on a driving force generated from the power source,
A driving mechanism characterized by the above.

A driving mechanism for driving the movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body,
A driving force transmitting body for transmitting a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed on the arm via a pin movable inside the pin receiving portion,
The driving force transmitting body rotates around a first straight line according to a driving force generated from a power source,
The pin is fixed to the driving force transmitting body,
The arm is interlocked with the driving force being transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin by the pin moving inside the pin receiving portion with the rotation of the driving force transmitting body. While the movable body rotates between a first position and a second position in conjunction with the rotation of the arm, while rotating about a second straight line as an axis,
When the movable body is at the first position, and when the movable body is at the second position, a line connecting the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body and the pin An intersection of the second straight line and the arm and a straight line connecting the pins are orthogonal to each other;
A driving mechanism characterized by the above.

  Note that the first straight line and the second straight line may be parallel, and in that case, a diagram viewed from the direction of the first straight line (the direction of the second straight line) (for example, a side view of the drive mechanism). , A straight line connecting the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body and the pin (for example, a straight line connecting the center of the gear and the pin), and a straight line connecting the intersection of the second straight line and the arm and the pin (for example, The straight line connecting the rotation center of the arm and the pin) may be orthogonal.

(4-1) a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door) which is attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) in which an image displayed by the display unit (display unit A) can be visually recognized. Mechanism UD), and
The display unit (display unit A)
A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) for reflecting light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) backward;
A first screen (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3);
It has a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), and the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) A different second screen (fixed screen mechanism D);
A screen housing (screen housing C10) that houses the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D);
The projector (projector mechanism B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D), and the screen casing (screen casing) C10) is configured as a unit,
The first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is driven by a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) to move between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position). Works with
The second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is disposed behind the second position (front exposure position), and the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is positioned at the second position (front exposure position). ), The image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), while the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position. When the projector is at the (front standby position), the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D),
The brightness of the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is lower than that of the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D).

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, two screens, the front screen mechanism E1 and the fixed screen mechanism D, are housed in the screen housing C10. The front screen mechanism E1 operates between the front standby position and the front exposure position by being driven by the front screen driving mechanism E2, and the fixed screen mechanism D is disposed behind the front exposure position. When the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position, the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1, while when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position, it is projected by the projector mechanism B2. The displayed image is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  Accordingly, the position of the front screen mechanism E1 when the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1, and the fixed screen when the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D. Comparing the position of the mechanism D, the fixed screen mechanism D is located behind the screen casing C10 than the front screen mechanism E1.

  Here, the far side of the screen casing C10 is more affected by irregular reflection due to the reflection of light on the wall of the screen casing C10. Therefore, the fixed screen mechanism D is more white than the front screen mechanism E1. Blur is likely to occur. In view of this point, in the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the brightness of the fixed screen mechanism D is lower than the brightness of the front screen mechanism E1. As a result, the image displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D can be prevented from being blurred, and the definition of the image can be improved.

(4-2) a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door) which is attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) in which an image displayed by the display unit (display unit A) can be visually recognized. Mechanism UD), and
The display unit (display unit A)
A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) for reflecting light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) backward;
A first screen (front screen mechanism E1) having one display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3);
A second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) having a plurality of display surfaces capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3). ,
The projector (projector mechanism B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) are configured as a unit. Yes,
The first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is driven by a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) to move between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position). Works with
When the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position), an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1). On the other hand, when the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position), an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the second screen (fixed screen mechanism E2). D)
The brightness of the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is lower than that of the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D).

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 has one display surface, and the fixed screen mechanism D has a plurality of display surfaces. Since the fixed screen mechanism D has a plurality of display surfaces, the influence of irregular reflection due to the reflection of light between the display surfaces is large and so-called white blur is likely to occur. Here, the brightness of the fixed screen mechanism D is lower than the brightness of the front screen mechanism E1. As a result, the image displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D can be prevented from being blurred, and the definition of the image can be improved.

  In the present invention, a first screen whose display surface is perpendicular to the optical axis of the irradiation light and a second screen whose display surface is not perpendicular to the optical axis of the irradiation light are provided, and the brightness of the second screen is adjusted. The brightness may be lower than the brightness of the first screen. Also in this case, it is possible to prevent the image displayed on the second screen from being blurred.

(5-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image and a screen (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) , A display unit (display unit A) configured by being unitized,
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body (cabinet G) and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen (front screen mechanism E1) can be viewed; With
The screen (front screen mechanism E1) has a first member (front screen member E11) having the display surface (projection surface E11a) and a second member having a surface provided with a convex portion (second pattern surface E12b). Of the first member (front screen member E11) on the opposite side of the display surface (projection surface E11a) and the second member (front screen support E12). ) Is fixed by contacting the surface opposite to the surface (the second pattern surface E12b) provided with the protrusions.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a and a front screen support E12 having a second pattern surface E12b. It is formed by fixing the surface opposite to the projection surface E11a and the surface of the front screen support base E12 opposite to the second pattern surface E12b so as to be in contact with each other. As described above, since the member having the projection surface E11a and the member having the second pattern surface E12b are formed as separate members, in the process of molding the front screen mechanism E1, the member is caused by the convex portion of the second pattern surface E12b. As a result, sink marks are formed on the projection surface E11a, and the accuracy of the screen is prevented from lowering. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to display an image on a screen with good accuracy.

(5-2) The surface (the second pattern surface E12b) of the screen (the front screen mechanism E1) on which the convex portions are provided is decorated with irregularities.
The screen (front screen mechanism E1) is driven by a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) to operate between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position). Do
When the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position), an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the screen (front screen mechanism E1), When the screen (the front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (the front standby position), the screen (the front screen mechanism E1) is applied to the surface (the second pattern surface E12b) provided with the convex portion. The decorated decoration is arranged so as to be visible through the display area (upper display window UD1).

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 is connected to the second pattern surface E12b (the surface opposite to the projection surface E11a, that is, the screen surface). The decoration applied to the back surface) is arranged so as to be visible through the upper display window UD1. Therefore, if the decoration is not applied, if the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position, the back surface of the front screen mechanism E1 will be directly visible to the player. In this case, the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine is significantly impaired, which is not desirable. From such a viewpoint, in the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the back surface of the front screen mechanism E1 is decorated.

  However, if it is attempted to integrally mold such a decorated front screen mechanism E1, a projection is formed on the projection surface E11a of the front screen mechanism E1 due to the projections constituting the decoration, and the accuracy of the screen is reduced. Will drop. In view of this point, in the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the member having the projection surface E11 and the member having the decorated surface are configured as separate members, and both members are fixed to each other. The front screen mechanism E1 is formed. This prevents sink marks from being formed on the projection surface E11 due to the decoration, thereby preventing the accuracy of the screen from being reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to display an image on a screen with good accuracy.

(6-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image, and a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) A display configured by unitizing a screen mechanism F1) and a screen housing (screen housing C10) that houses the screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1). A unit (display unit A);
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
A display area (upper display window UD1) is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body (cabinet G) and allows the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) to be viewed. Opening and closing door (upper door mechanism UD),
A perforated plate (perforated plate B15) in which a plurality of holes are formed,
The perforated plate (perforated plate B15) is arranged such that the projector (projector mechanism B2) is difficult to view through the display area (upper display window UD1), and the plurality of holes are formed in the perforated plate ( A space in which the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) is accommodated in the screen housing (screen housing C10) with the perforated plate B15) as a boundary, and the projector (projector) A passage through which air can flow is formed with the space in which the mechanism B2) is arranged.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 in the screen housing C10 are accommodated by the plurality of holes formed in the perforated plate B15. A passage through which air can flow is formed between the space and the space where the projector mechanism B2 is arranged. Therefore, the space in which the screen is accommodated (the area opened for projecting an image) in the screen housing C10 can be used for heat radiation, so that the heat generated by the projector mechanism B2 can be efficiently released. it can. Further, since the perforated plate B15 is arranged such that the projector mechanism B2 is difficult to see through the upper display window UD1 provided in the upper door mechanism UD, the player cannot easily see the projector mechanism B2. It can be prevented that the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine is impaired by the appearance of.

(6-2) The projector (projector mechanism B2) is disposed above a screen (fixed screen mechanism D) erected on the screen casing (screen casing C10), and emits light forward. It is possible to irradiate,
The gaming machine further comprises:
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) disposed in front of the projector (projector mechanism B2) so as to reflect light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) obliquely downward and rearward;
The perforated plate (perforated plate B15) is disposed above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D) so as to cover the lower surface of the projector (projector mechanism B2).

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the fixed screen mechanism D is erected on the screen housing C10, and the projector mechanism B2 is disposed above the fixed screen mechanism D. Therefore, a relatively large space extends below the projector mechanism B2. The perforated plate B15 is disposed above the fixed screen mechanism D so as to cover the lower surface of the projector mechanism B2. Therefore, since the relatively large space can be used for heat radiation, the heat generated by the projector mechanism B2 can be more efficiently released.

(7-1) a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable,
The display unit (display unit A)
A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) for reflecting light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2);
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3). And
The projector (projector mechanism B2), the reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3), and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are configured as a unit,
The position of the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) can be adjusted from outside the display unit (display unit A) with the open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) opened.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, in the display unit A, the projector mechanism B2, the mirror mechanism B3, and the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are unitized. However, the mirror mechanism B3 can adjust the position from outside the display unit A with the upper door mechanism UD opened. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1, since the position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted, the position of the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is not appropriate. Even in this case, the projection position can be adjusted.

(7-2) The projector (projector mechanism B2) and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit (display unit A). ,
The projector (projector mechanism B2) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1), and can irradiate light forward,
The reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) is disposed in front of the projector (projector mechanism B2) so as to reflect light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) obliquely downward and rearward, and By changing the degree of screwing of the screws exposed toward the opening side of the part (cabinet G), it is possible to adjust the reflection direction of the light.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the projector mechanism B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit A. On the other hand, the mirror mechanism B3 is provided with a screw for adjusting the light reflection direction, and the screw is exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet G. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1, by loosening or tightening the screw with the upper door mechanism UD opened, the light reflection direction (angle) can be changed. Can be adjusted. Thereby, even if the position of the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is not appropriate, the projection position can be adjusted.

  In the embodiment described above, the projector mechanism B2, the mirror mechanism B3, and the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have been described as being unitized. However, the projector mechanism, the mirror mechanism, and the various screens may be directly attached to the main body of the gaming machine without being unitized.

  Also, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the present invention is applied to a pachislot machine, but the present invention can also be applied to other game machines (for example, pachinko game machines and slot machines). .

(8-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying a video,
The display unit includes:
A projector (irradiation light device B) for projecting an image,
First and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) that can be projected by the projector, each of which is outside the projection range of the projector and different from each other for each screen. A first position operable between a position (front standby position / reel standby position) and a second position (front exposure position / reel exposure position) within the projection range of the projector and to be projected by the projector; And a second screen;
Drive means for independently driving the first and second screens between the first position and the second position (a front screen mechanism E1, a reel screen drive mechanism F2, and a sub control Device SS),
Detecting whether the first screen is at the first position (front standby position), detecting whether the first screen is at the second position (front exposure position), And detecting means (sensor mechanism CS) for detecting whether or not the second screen is at the first position (reel standby position).
The operating range between the first position and the second position of each of the first and second screens partially includes an overlapping range that overlaps with each other, and the first and second screens each have an overlapping range. The second position of each of the screens is in the overlap range in the operating range,
The driving means,
When performing a return operation to return each of the first and second screens to an origin position existing in a range excluding the overlapping range in the operation range,
The first and second screens are driven in accordance with a driving procedure of the first and second screens corresponding to respective positions of the first and second screens based on a detection result of the detection unit.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of performing an effect by operating a movable body (see JP-A-2013-013685). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only with the image or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body. In recent years, a gaming machine equipped with an effect device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed in order to further enhance the effect of the effect. Although the space inside the gaming machine is finite, a plurality of movable bodies can be provided by limiting the size of each movable body or overlapping the operation range of each movable body. Here, in the case where the operation ranges of the movable bodies overlap, if the plurality of movable bodies are operated simultaneously, there is a possibility that the movable bodies come into contact (interference) with each other. Normally, appropriate control is performed so that such interference does not occur. However, when the operation of the movable body is not performed normally, or when the movable body is manually moved while the power is shut off, the movable body is not considered without considering such an abnormal situation. , There is a possibility that the movable bodies interfere with each other. When the movable bodies come into contact with each other, there is a possibility that the effect device may be damaged.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the detection result of the detection unit differs depending on the position of each of the first and second screens. The first positions of the first and second screens are different from each other. For this reason, when the detecting means detects that one screen exists at the first position, no interference occurs even if the other screen is driven. Therefore, by returning the other screen to the origin position first and then returning the one screen to the origin position, the return operation can be performed without interference between the screens. Since only one of the first and second screens can be arranged at the second position, the detecting means detects that the first screen is at the second position. The second screen will not be in the second position. In this case, by returning the second screen to the origin position first and then returning the first screen to the origin position, the return operation can be performed without interference between the screens. As described above, in the return operation, the screens interfere with each other by driving the first and second screens in accordance with the driving procedures corresponding to the respective positions of the first and second screens based on the detection result of the detection unit. Without returning, it is possible to return to the respective origin positions. As a result, by appropriately driving the first and second screens in the processing after the return operation, it is possible to reliably prevent the screens from interfering with each other.

(8-2) The detection means (sensor mechanism CS)
Two first sensors (sensor CS1 and sensor CS3) corresponding to the first and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1), respectively, and the corresponding screen is in the first position (front). (A standby position and a reel standby position)
A second sensor corresponding to the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) for detecting whether or not the corresponding first screen is at the second position (front exposure position). A second sensor;
The driving means (sub-control device SS)
The first sensor detects that the first screen is at the first position, and the second sensor is that the first screen is at the second position. Is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  According to the above configuration, since the first screen does not exist at the first position and the second position at the same time, the first sensor detects that the first screen exists at the first position. And when the second sensor detects that the first screen is present at the second position, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred.

(9-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
The display unit includes:
A projector (irradiation light device B) for projecting an image,
First and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) that can be projected by the projector, each of which is outside the projection range of the projector and different from each other for each screen. A first position operable between a position (front standby position / reel standby position) and a second position (front exposure position / reel exposure position) within the projection range of the projector and to be projected by the projector; And a second screen;
Drive means for independently driving the first and second screens between the first position and the second position (a front screen mechanism E1, a reel screen drive mechanism F2, and a sub control Device SS),
It is detected whether the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position), and the first screen is at the second position (front exposure position). Detection means (sensor mechanism CS) for detecting whether or not the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) exists at the first position (reel exposure position). ,
The operating range of each of the first and second screens partially includes an overlapping range that overlaps with each other, and the second position of each of the first and second screens is in the operating range. Exists in the overlapping range,
The driving means,
When performing a return operation to return each of the first and second screens to an origin position existing in a range excluding the overlapping range in the operation range,
A first condition under which the detecting means detects that the first screen is present at any one of the first position and the second position, and When at least one of the second conditions for detecting the presence at the first position is satisfied,
Driving the first and second screens according to a driving procedure of the first and second screens corresponding to respective positions of the first and second screens based on a detection result of the detection unit;
If none of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied,
One of the first and second screens is driven to return to the origin position, and then the other of the first and second screens is detected by the detecting means. The other screen is driven to return to the origin position according to a driving procedure according to a detection result as to whether or not the screen is at the first position.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of performing an effect by operating a movable body (see JP-A-2013-013685). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only with the image or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body. In recent years, a gaming machine equipped with an effect device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed in order to further enhance the effect of the effect. Although the space inside the gaming machine is finite, a plurality of movable bodies can be provided by limiting the size of each movable body or overlapping the operation range of each movable body. Here, in the case where the operation ranges of the movable bodies overlap, if the plurality of movable bodies are operated simultaneously, there is a possibility that the movable bodies come into contact (interference) with each other. Normally, appropriate control is performed so that such interference does not occur. However, when the operation of the movable body is not performed normally, or when the movable body is manually moved while the power is shut off, the movable body is not considered without considering such an abnormal situation. , There is a possibility that the movable bodies interfere with each other. When the movable bodies come into contact with each other, there is a possibility that the effect device may be damaged.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the detection result of the detection unit differs depending on the position of each of the first and second screens. The first positions of the first and second screens are different from each other. For this reason, when the detecting means detects that one screen exists at the first position, no interference occurs even if the other screen is driven. Therefore, by returning the other screen to the origin position first and then returning the one screen to the origin position, the return operation can be performed without interference between the screens. Since only one of the first and second screens can be arranged at the second position, the detecting means detects that the first screen is at the second position. The second screen will not be in the second position. In this case, by returning the second screen to the origin position first and then returning the first screen to the origin position, the return operation can be performed without interference between the screens. As described above, the first condition in which the detecting means detects that the first screen exists at any of the first position and the second position, and the detecting means determines that the second screen is in the second position If at least one of the second conditions for detecting the presence at the first position is satisfied, the driving procedure is performed according to the position of each of the first and second screens based on the detection result of the detection means. By driving the first and second screens, the screens can be returned to their respective origin positions without interference.

  On the other hand, when neither of the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, the first screen is located between the first position and the second position, and The second screen is located at a position other than the second position. Further, in this case, there is a possibility that the other screen operates in accordance with the operation of one screen. Therefore, according to the invention of (1), first, after one screen is returned to the origin position, the detection means responds to the detection result of whether or not another screen exists at the first position. The other screen is returned to the origin position according to the driving procedure. Thereby, even when neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, it is possible to reliably return the first and second screens to the origin positions.

(9-2) The detecting means (sensor mechanism CS)
Two first sensors (sensor CS1 and sensor CS3) corresponding to the first and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1), respectively, and the corresponding screen is in the first position (front). (A standby position and a reel standby position)
A second sensor corresponding to the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) for detecting whether or not the corresponding first screen is at the second position (front exposure position). A second sensor;
The driving means (sub-control device SS)
The first sensor detects that the first screen is at the first position, and the second sensor is that the first screen is at the second position. Is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  According to the above configuration, since the first screen does not exist at the first position and the second position at the same time, the first sensor detects that the first screen exists at the first position. And when the second sensor detects that the first screen is present at the second position, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred.

(10-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying a video,
The display unit includes:
A projector (irradiation light device B) for projecting an image,
A first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) fixed at a predetermined position of the display unit and capable of being projected by the projector;
Second and third screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) that can be projected by the projector, each of which is a first position (front standby position / reel) outside the projection range of the projector The number of times different from each other between a standby position) and a second position (front exposure position / reel exposure position) which is ahead of the first screen and is to be projected by the projector instead of the first screen. A second screen and a third screen, which are rotatable about a moving axis (a rotation center axis FG and a rotation center axis RG);
A drive mechanism (a front screen drive mechanism E2 / reel screen drive mechanism F2) for driving the second and third screens independently between the first position and the second position. With
In each of the second and third screens, an operation range between the first position and the second position is partially overlapped with each other;
The rotation axis (rotation center axis FG) of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is higher than the rotation axis (rotation center axis RG) of the third screen (reel screen mechanism F1). Yes,
In the first position (front standby position), the second screen is disposed above the first screen and outside the operating range of the third screen.
In the first position (reel standby position), the third screen is located behind the first screen and outside the operating range of the second screen.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of performing an effect by operating a movable body (see JP-A-2013-013685). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only with the image or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body. In recent years, a gaming machine equipped with an effect device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed in order to further enhance the effect of the effect. Since the space inside the gaming machine is limited, space saving is required in providing a plurality of movable bodies, but by limiting the size of each movable body or overlapping the operating range of each movable body, A plurality of movable bodies can be provided. Here, in the case where the operation ranges of the movable bodies overlap, if the plurality of movable bodies are operated simultaneously, there is a possibility that the movable bodies come into contact (interference) with each other. When the movable bodies come into contact with each other, there is a possibility that the effect device may be damaged.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the second screen and the third screen are rotated about different rotation axes. This makes it possible to reduce the overlapping ranges of the operating range of the second screen and the operating range of the third screen. Further, the rotation axis of the second screen is arranged above the rotation axis of the third screen, and the second screen is arranged above the first screen at the first position. With this configuration, the operating range between the first position and the second position of the second screen can be reduced. In addition, by disposing the third screen at the first position behind the first screen, when the third screen is disposed at the first position, the third screen is connected to the second screen. The possibility of contact can be eliminated. As described above, it is possible to efficiently arrange the three screens in the gaming machine while reducing the possibility that the three screens will contact each other.

(10-2) The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2 / reel screen drive mechanism F2)
The driving of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is executed on condition that the third screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is at the first position (reel standby position).
The driving of the third screen is executed on condition that the second screen is at the first position (front standby position).

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to reliably prevent the second screen and the third screen from coming into contact with each other.

  (10-3) Each of the first to third screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1) is a projection on which an image emitted from the projector (irradiation light device B) is projected. The shapes of the surfaces are different from each other.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the shapes of the projection surfaces of the first to third screens are different from each other, even if the same image is emitted from the projector, the image is expressed in a different manner for each screen. It is possible to diversify the production.

(10-4) The projection surface of any one of the first to third screens (the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1) is the aforementioned screen. When being a projection target of the projector, in a side view, the projection surface is an arc surface having a convex arc shape on the upstream side in the irradiation direction of light emitted from the projector (irradiation light device B),
The projection surface of any one of the first to third screens (front screen mechanism E1) is a flat surface.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to express images in different modes by using a screen mechanism having a projection surface having an arc surface and a screen mechanism having a flat projection surface.

(11-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying a video,
The display unit includes:
A projector (irradiation light device B) for projecting an image,
A movable screen (front screen mechanism E1) that can be a projection target of the projector, a first position (front standby position) outside the projection range of the projector, and a second position (a front standby position) that is a projection target of the projector ( A movable screen that can be operated between
A driving mechanism (a front screen driving mechanism E2) for driving the movable screen between the first position and the second position.
The drive mechanism is
A motor (drive motor E25);
A shaft (shaft member E3) that rotates when the motor is driven;
Two gears (intermediate gears E23 and E23) provided at both ends of the shaft and rotating together with the shaft;
Two arms (crank members E22 and E22) that are connected to the two gears and are rotated around a rotation axis along a predetermined direction by rotating the two gears; And two arms connected to both ends of the screen in the predetermined direction.
The movable screen rotates between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the rotation of the two arms about the rotation axis (rotation center axis FG). .

  BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of performing an effect by rotating a movable body around an axis (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only with the image or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body. In recent years, in order to further enhance the effect, a display device such as a liquid crystal display device that switches between a state in which the display unit is shielded by the movable body and a state in which the display unit is opened (exposed) before and after the movable body rotates is proposed. I have. This makes it possible to create a sense of unity between the movement of the movable body and the state of visual recognition of another accessory such as a display means, so that a variety of effects can be performed. However, when the display means and the like (an additional object) are provided together with the movable body, there is a problem that the rotation axis (shaft) of the movable body obstructs the arrangement of the display means and the like. In this regard, it is conceivable that the rotation axis of the movable body is provided above, below, or on the side of the separate object so as not to hinder the arrangement of the separate object. Since the shaft is disposed at the end, there is a problem that the range of rotation of the movable body is limited, and the size of the movable body is also restricted.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the shaft is not used as the rotation axis of the screen (two arms). This increases the degree of freedom in arranging the shaft, so that the shaft can be arranged so as not to hinder the arrangement of another accessory. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the additional objects while maintaining the rotation range and the size of the screen at desired levels. Further, each of the two arms is rotated with the rotation of two gears connected to both ends of the shaft. Therefore, the shaft can transmit the driving force of the motor evenly to each of the two arms. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive load from being concentrated on one arm.

  (11-2) The motor (drive motor E25) is connected to one of the two gears (intermediate gears E23 and E23), and transmits a driving force to the one gear to rotate. Then, the shaft (the shaft member E3) is rotated.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the motor is connected to the gear provided at any one end of the shaft, and the motor is controlled so as not to hinder the arrangement of the separate accessory (such as the fixed screen mechanism). Can be located near the end of the shaft. As a result, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom in arranging the additional objects.

(11-3) a fixed screen (fixed screen mechanism D) fixed to a predetermined position of the display unit (display unit A) and capable of being projected by the projector (irradiation light device B);
When the movable screen (front screen mechanism E1) is located at the first position (front standby position), the fixed screen becomes a projection target of the projector,
When the movable screen is arranged at the second position (front exposure position), the movable screen is arranged in front of the fixed screen and is to be projected by the projector instead of the fixed screen;
The shaft (shaft member E3) is disposed behind the fixed screen,
The rotation axis (rotation center axis FG) of the two arms (crank members E22 and E22) is disposed forward of a rear end position of the fixed screen.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the shaft is disposed behind the fixed screen as a separate object, so that light projected on the fixed screen is not obstructed by the shaft. In addition, since the rotating shafts of the two arms can be disposed forward of the rear end position of the fixed screen, the rotation axes of the two arms can be rotated with respect to the movable screen as compared with the case where they are disposed behind the rear end position of the fixed screen. The length between the moving shaft and the arm (length of the arm) can be reduced. Therefore, the size of the movable screen can be maintained at a desired level even when the space in the gaming machine is limited and the size of the display unit cannot be increased.

(12-1) a housing (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
A partition plate (intermediate support plate G1) for partitioning the inside of the housing into a first upper space and a second lower space;
A display unit (display unit A) mounted on the partition plate and exchangeably housed in the first space of the housing;
A relay board (relay board CK) for relaying wiring for connecting the display unit and a device housed in the second space;
The display unit includes:
An accommodating portion (screen casing C10) having a pair of side plates (right plate C2 / left plate C3) and a back plate (back plate C4);
Display means (fixed screen mechanism D / front screen mechanism E1 / reel screen mechanism F1) housed in the housing section for displaying an image,
The back plate in the storage portion is disposed forward of a rear end of the pair of side walls,
The relay board is arranged on a back surface (back wall G3) of the housing, and on a third space (GS) defined by the back plate and the pair of side plates in the housing portion,
The partition plate has an opening (through hole G11) through which the wiring is inserted at a position facing the third space.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a plurality of parts are unitized so that they can be replaced in units to facilitate replacement of various parts. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-183427 discloses a variable display device capable of displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information, a control device for controlling the variable display device, and a variable display unit in which a unit case accommodating the variable display device is unitized. A gaming machine removably housed in a body is disclosed. In the gaming machine disclosed in this publication, the inside of the housing is vertically divided by a variable display unit mounting table, a variable display unit is mounted on the upper half of the housing, and devices such as a power supply device are mounted on the lower half of the housing. Attached. Then, a relay board for relaying wiring for electrically connecting a control device of the variable display unit and a device mounted on the lower half of the housing is mounted on the front surface of the variable display unit. By the way, if the wiring is arranged in front of the various devices in the housing, the wiring hinders the appearance and operation of the various devices. Therefore, it is desirable to arrange the wiring behind the various devices. However, in the gaming machine disclosed in the above publication, since the relay board is mounted on the front of the variable display unit, wiring between the relay board and the device mounted on the lower half of the housing is changed for various devices. It is difficult to arrange behind.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the relay board is arranged in the third space behind the display unit in the housing. The wiring connecting the relay board and the device housed in the second space passes through an opening formed at a position facing the third space in the partition plate. As a result, wiring can be easily arranged behind various devices in the housing, so that the degree of freedom of wiring can be increased. Furthermore, since the relay board is disposed in the rear surface of the housing and in the third space defined by the back plate and the pair of side plates in the housing section, when the display unit is housed in the housing section, Contact with the back surface of the housing can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the relay board will break down.

  (12-2) The relay board (relay board CK) is arranged below the third space (space GS).

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the relay board is disposed below the third space, the wiring is connected to the relay board from the second space via the opening formed in the partition plate. It becomes easy to do.

(13-1) a display unit (display unit A);
A main body housing (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface and accommodating the display unit in a replaceable manner,
The display unit includes:
Display means (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) for displaying an image,
A display unit housing (housing A1) that houses the display means;
A concave portion (concave portion B132) is formed continuously from the front end toward the rear at both side ends of the top plate member (projector cover B1) in the display unit casing. Thus, a work space (space BS) for installing and fixing the main body housing to the island facility (fixed plate member OC) disposed above the main body housing is defined.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a plurality of parts are unitized so that they can be replaced in units to facilitate replacement of various parts. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-183427 discloses a variable display device capable of displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information, a control device for controlling the variable display device, and a variable display unit in which a unit case accommodating the variable display device is unitized. A gaming machine removably housed in a body is disclosed. By the way, generally, a game machine such as a pachislot machine and a pachinko machine is installed in an island facility in a game facility to conduct business. When the gaming machine is installed on the island facility, the gaming machine is fixed to the island facility by driving nails or the like from the inside of the housing to the island facility via the top plate. Here, when installing a gaming machine whose units can be exchanged as described above in the island facility, the installation work of the gaming machine is performed with the unit removed so as not to damage the unit. Is required of workers. However, actually, the worker does not want to increase the amount of work, and performs the installation work of the gaming machine in a state in which the unit is housed, thereby causing a problem that the unit is damaged. If the unit is damaged, it may not be possible to reuse the unit, and since it will be different from a normal gaming machine, it will not be allowed to operate because it is not a licensed gaming machine There is a fear.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, concave portions are formed at both end portions of the top plate member in the display unit housing. Thus, even when the display unit is housed in the main body housing, a work space for installation and fixing to the island facility is secured between the display unit and the main body housing. As a result, it is possible to install the gaming machine in the island facility with the display unit housed while preventing the display unit from being damaged.

(13-2) An opening (opening G41) penetrating vertically is formed in the top plate member (upper wall G4) of the main body casing (cabinet G).
The main body housing includes a soft member (plate member G42) that is attached to the top plate member so as to close the opening and that is softer than the top plate member.
The work space (space BS) is a space in which a nail from the soft member to the island facility (fixed plate member OC) can be driven from inside the main body housing.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to drive a nail without interfering with the display unit while the display unit is housed in the main body housing. This makes it possible to reliably fix the gaming machine to the island facility while preventing the display unit from being damaged. Further, by driving a nail into a soft member softer than the top plate member of the main body housing, the gaming machine can be easily installed on the island facility.

(14-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying a video,
The display unit includes:
A first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) that can be a projection target of a projector (irradiation light device B) that projects an image;
A second screen that can be a projection target of the projector, a first position that is disposed in front of the first screen and is a projection target of the projector instead of the first screen; A second screen (a front screen mechanism E1 and a reel screen mechanism F1) operable between a second position outside the projection range of FIG.
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2 / reel screen drive mechanism F2) for driving the second screen between the first position and the second position;
A housing (screen housing C10) that houses the first screen, the second screen, and the driving mechanism;
A relay board (relay board CK) for relaying wiring for connecting the drive mechanism and a device outside the display unit;
In the housing (screen housing C10), at least a bottom plate (bottom plate C1), a side plate (right side plate C2 / left side plate C3), and a back plate (back plate C4) are separately molded, and the bottom plate, It is configured by assembling the side plate, and the back plate,
Each of the first screen, the driving mechanism, and the relay board is positioned and arranged on any one of the bottom plate, the side plate, and the back plate, and the positioned plates are mutually positioned. different.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a plurality of parts are unitized so that they can be replaced in units to facilitate replacement of various parts. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-183427 discloses a variable display device capable of displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information, a control device for controlling the variable display device, and a variable display unit in which a unit case accommodating the variable display device is unitized. A gaming machine removably housed in a body is disclosed. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-183427, the unitized variable display unit is basically a unit commonly mounted regardless of the model of the gaming machine. The effect devices and the like that cannot be shared among the models depending on the model are not unitized. Here, if the rendering device depending on the model is manufactured separately for each model, the burden of the manufacturing cost increases.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, different functional components are positioned and arranged on each plate of the housing (screen housing C10). Therefore, even when the entire display unit (display unit A) cannot be shared among the models, it may be possible to achieve the commonality between the models in the unit of the housing plate. As a result, it is possible to manufacture the display unit at a lower cost than in the case of manufacturing the display unit (for each model).

  (14-2) The housing (screen housing C10) is assembled such that the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), the side plates (right side plate C2 / left side plate C3), and the back plate (back plate C4) are replaceable. Have been.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, each plate of the housing (screen housing C10) is exchangeably assembled. Therefore, the members of the display unit (display unit A) can be exchanged for each plate. This makes it possible to change the specifications of the display unit while exchanging the members of the display unit by exchanging the members in units of boards.

(14-3) The bottom plate (bottom plate C1) is provided with a concave portion (center mounting portion C11) for positioning and mounting the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D),
The drive mechanisms (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) are positioned and arranged on the side plates (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3),
The relay board (relay board CK) is positioned and arranged on the back board (back board C4).

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the relay board (relay board CK) that relays the wiring is positioned and arranged on the back plate (the back plate C4), so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the wiring. be able to. Further, since the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is positioned by being mounted on the concave portion (center mounting portion C11) formed in the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), the side plate (right side plate C2 / left side plate C3) is positioned. ) Or the back plate (back plate C4), the first screen can be positioned on the housing by a simpler method.

(14-4) The display unit (display unit A)
Decorative member (right movable body base C5, left Movable body base C6) is further provided,
In the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), a concave portion (right mounting portion C12 / left mounting portion C13) for disposing the decorative member is formed.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, by disposing the decorative member between the drive mechanism and the second screen, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to visually recognize the drive mechanism. As a result, the beauty of the gaming machine can be improved. Further, since a concave portion for disposing the decorative member is formed on the bottom plate of the housing, the decorative member can be easily disposed on the housing.

(15-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
The display unit includes:
A projector (irradiation light device B) for projecting an image,
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) that is arranged in front of the projector and reflects light emitted from the projector obliquely downward and rearward;
A first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) which can be a projection target of the projector;
A second screen (front screen mechanism E1) that can be a projection target of the projector, a first position (front standby position) that is disposed above the first screen and that is outside the projection range of the projector; A second screen disposed forward of the first screen and operable between a second position (front exposure position) to be projected by the projector instead of the first screen;
An arm (crank members E22, E22) having a rotation axis (rotation center axis FG) connected to the second screen;
By transmitting a driving force generated from a power source (drive motor E25) to the arm and rotating the arm about the rotation axis, the second screen is moved to the first position and to the first position. A driving force transmitting member (crank gears E21, E21, intermediate gears E23, E23) that operates between the second position and the second position.
The rotation axis (rotation center axis FG) of the arm is located at a position farther from the center of the second screen when the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position). Is also located above,
The arm is connected to a position that is above the second screen when the second screen is in the first position;
When the second screen is at the second position, the second screen is inclined upward from a rear end far from the reflection mirror to a front end close to the reflection mirror. Is configured.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines that display an image projected from a projector on a screen are known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to this type of gaming machine, it is possible to express images on the same level as a liquid crystal display, and it is possible to reduce the cost when the size is increased as compared with the liquid crystal display. In addition, by appropriately setting the shape of the screen, it is possible to express an image that is impossible with a liquid crystal display. By the way, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of screens including a movable screen in a gaming machine in order to expand the range of video expression. In such a gaming machine, when a movable screen is to be projected by the projector, it is necessary to arrange the movable screen in front of other screens. On the other hand, when a screen other than the movable screen is to be projected by the projector, it is necessary to arrange the movable screen outside the projection range of the projector so that the projection on the other screen is not hindered. is there. However, since the space for accommodating the display unit is limited in the housing of the gaming machine, the size of the display unit cannot be increased. For this reason, the space in which the movable screen can operate is also limited, and it is difficult to increase the size of the movable screen.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the rotation axis of the arm is disposed above the center of the second screen when the second screen is at the second position, and the arm is When the second screen is at the second position, the second screen is connected to a position above the second screen. Thereby, the operation range when operating between the first position and the second position of the second screen can be reduced. By thus reducing the operating range of the second screen, the size of the second screen can be increased. In addition, when the second screen is in the first position, the second screen is configured to be inclined upward from a rear end far from the reflection mirror to a front end close to the reflection mirror. Have been. Thus, the vertical distance between the first screen and the second screen can be reduced within a range in which the projection of the projector onto the first screen is not hindered. As a result, the size of the second screen can be further increased.

  The projector (irradiation light device B) is disposed above the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) and the second screen (front screen mechanism E1). And has an inclined surface that is inclined upward from the rear to the front.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the lower surface of the projector has the inclined surface that is inclined upward from the rear toward the front, the lower surface of the projector and the second screen located at the second position are different from each other. The vertical interval can be shortened. As a result, the size of the second screen can be further increased.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a plurality of doors has been known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-52525). By providing a plurality of doors in this way, it is only necessary to open the corresponding doors for purposes such as replenishing medals, adjusting reel devices, and repairing the devices. There is an advantage that the inside does not need to be exposed.

However, in the case where a plurality of doors are provided, locking means for locking each of the doors must be provided, so that there is a problem that the unlocking operation becomes complicated and the number of parts increases.
Also, inside the gaming machine, there are places that are accessed frequently, such as the supply of medals, and some places, such as control boards, that have high security and are rarely accessed. There is also a need to employ locking means.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can perform unlocking work smoothly and enhance security inside the gaming machine. I do.

(16-1) One of the present inventions is an upper space having an upper door mechanism DU that can be opened and closed,
A lower space having a lower door mechanism DD that can be opened and closed;
An upper door lock mechanism G52 capable of locking the upper door mechanism DU,
A lower door lock mechanism G51 capable of locking the upper door mechanism DU,
With
The upper door lock mechanism G52 is
A tube G5222 provided in the upper space;
A locking plate G5221 formed with claw portions G5221a and G5221b and slidable in a cylinder G5222;
Locked parts G511 and G521 provided on the upper door mechanism DU;
The lower door mechanism DD is
In a state where the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the lower door mechanism DD interferes with the locking plate G5221, thereby stopping the sliding of the locking plate G5221, the locking plate G5221 is held in the cylinder G5222, and the claw portion is formed. In a state in which G5221a and G5221b are locked by the locked portions G511 and G521 and the lower door mechanism DD is opened, the interference of the lower door mechanism DD with the locking plate G5221 is released, and the locking plate G5221 is slid. The gaming machine 1 is provided at a position where the locking plate G5221 releases the locking of the locked portions G511 and G521.

According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed (the lower door mechanism DD is locked), the lower door mechanism DD physically interferes with the locking plate G5221, so that the locking plate G5221 slides. Stop moving. Then, by holding the locking plate G5221 in which the sliding is stopped in the cylinder G5222, the claw portions G5221a and G5221b are locked to the locked bars G521a and G521b, and the upper door mechanism DU is moved to the upper space. On the other hand, it is locked.
On the other hand, in a state where the lower door mechanism DD is opened (a state where the lower door mechanism DD is unlocked), the physical interference of the lower door mechanism DD with the locking plate G5221 is released. G5222 is slidable, and the locking of the claw portions G5221a and G5221b with the locking rods G521a and G521b is released, so that the lock on the upper space of the upper door mechanism DU can be released.
Accordingly, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, a procedure for unlocking the lower door mechanism DD by the lower door lock mechanism G51 can be required first. That is, in order to open the upper door mechanism DU, it is necessary to unlock the lower door lock mechanism G51, open the lower door mechanism DD, and unlock the upper door lock mechanism G52. Can be enhanced.
As a result, the security of the upper space can be higher than that of the lower space, and the lower space can be a place that can be accessed more smoothly than the upper space.

(16-2) The present invention provides the gaming machine 1, wherein the lower door lock mechanism G51 is a cylinder lock G513 that can be locked and unlocked with a key.
Between the lower door mechanism DD and the lower space, a one-way hinge DD54 that applies a predetermined torque in a direction in which the lower door mechanism DD closes is provided,
The locking portion G522 has a claw shape,
The locked portion G521 has a rod shape,
It is characterized in that the claw portions G5221a and G5221b having a claw shape are locked by being hooked on the bar-shaped locked bars G521a and G521b.

According to the above configuration, in order to unlock the lower door mechanism DD, it is necessary to unlock the cylinder lock G513 with a key. For the manager of the gaming machine 1, there is an advantage that the key is easy to manage because the key is compact and portable.
Further, between the lower door mechanism DD and the lower space, a one-way hinge DD54 that applies a predetermined torque in a direction in which the lower door mechanism DD closes is employed. Thereby, when closing the lower door mechanism DD, torque is applied, and the lower door mechanism DD can be quietly closed with respect to the lower space without applying a sudden load. This can prevent a sudden load from being applied to the locking plate G5221 physically interfered by the lower door mechanism DD.
In addition, the sliding of the locking plate G5221 causes the claw-shaped claw portions G5221a and G5221b to be hooked or released from the bar-shaped locked bars G521a and G521b. Thereby, it becomes possible to lock the upper space of the upper door mechanism DU in conjunction with the sliding of the locking plate G5221.

(16-3) The upper door mechanism DU is rotatably supported at one end of the upper space, and
The upper door lock mechanism G52 is characterized in that it is provided at an end opposite to the end that is pivotally supported.

  According to the above configuration, since the upper door lock mechanism G52 is arranged on the side where the upper door mechanism DU is opened and closed, it is not necessary to open the lower door mechanism DD widely to unlock the upper door lock mechanism G52. . Thereby, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is not necessary to unnecessarily expose the inside of the lower space to the outside, and it is possible to enhance security.

  Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-24410, there has been known a gaming machine in which a component is divided into a plurality of units, and a connecting member connects the components. By adopting the configuration divided into a plurality of units as described above, it is only necessary to replace the unit when the specification is changed or repaired, and there is an advantage that the change or repair of the specification is facilitated.

  However, if the unit is divided into a plurality of units and the number of units is increased, it may take time to assemble, replace, and disassemble.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can easily perform operations when assembling, replacing parts, and disassembling the gaming machine. I do.

(17-1) One aspect of the present invention relates to a cabinet G having a lower door DD1 that can be opened and closed,
A plurality of reels RL, RC, RR provided on the inner side of the lower door DD1 and provided with a plurality of types of symbols are provided, and a variable display and a stop display of the symbols allocated on the reels RL, RC, RR are performed. A reel unit RU capable of
A start lever DD6 for outputting a command signal in accordance with an operation by a player;
A symbol provided on the rear side of the reel unit RU and arranged on the reels RL, RC, RR by stopping the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR based on a command signal output from the start lever DD6. A main control board MS for stopping and displaying
A gaming machine 1 comprising:

According to the above configuration, the lower door DD1 is provided with the reel unit RU, and the reel unit RU is further provided with the main control board MS. In this way, by integrating the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS, the work when assembling, replacing parts, and disassembling the gaming machine 1 can be easily performed.
In addition, the main control board MS is an important component for controlling the game, and requires measures to prevent unauthorized removal. However, the main control board MS is difficult to remove because it is integrated with the reel unit RU. It can be configured.
The main control board MS is provided on the back surface of the reel unit RU provided inside the lower door DD1. Thereby, the main control board MS can be arranged on the far side of the cabinet G far from the lower door DD1 by the thickness of the lower door DD1 and the reel unit RU. Thereby, a physical distance can be secured between the lower door DD1 and the main control board MS, and even if an unauthorized intrusion occurs through the gap of the lower door DD1, the arrival at the main control board MS is prevented. It becomes difficult and security can be improved.

  (17-2) The present invention is characterized in that in the gaming machine 1, the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrally formed.

  According to the above configuration, since the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrally formed, when the specifications of the gaming machine 1 are changed, the exterior of the lower door DD1 is changed, the reels RL, The change of the symbols of RC and RR and the change of the game content can be performed collectively.

  Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-65493, in order to prevent unauthorized operation on an operation plate provided on a power supply device, a cover for covering the operation plate is provided, and the cover is further attached to a closed position. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine provided with a biasing cover biasing means is known. According to such a gaming machine, unauthorized operation on the power supply device can be prevented.

  However, if the urging force of the cover urging means is increased, a strong force is required to open the cover, and the operability may be reduced. Further, if the urging force by the cover urging means is weakened, a sufficient urging force to the operation plate is not applied, and the effectiveness of preventing unauthorized operation may be reduced.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the security of a power supply device without lowering the operability of the power supply device. And

(18-1) One aspect of the present invention relates to a cabinet G having a lower door mechanism DD that can be opened and closed,
A power supply device DE provided in the lower space;
A speaker DD25L provided in the lower door mechanism DD;
With
The power supply DE is
A power switch DE1 for selecting whether or not to supply power;
A switch cover DE2 that switches between an open state in which the power switch DE1 can be operated and a closed state in which the power switch DE1 cannot be operated;
The speaker DD25L is
When the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the gaming machine 1 has a convex portion DD25L1 for interrupting the movement path of the switch cover DE2 and restricting the switch cover DE2 from being opened. .

According to the above configuration, by closing the lower door mechanism DD, the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided in the lower door mechanism DD interrupts the movement path of the switch cover DE2, and the switch cover DE2 is opened. Can be regulated. On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is opened, the restriction on the switch cover DE2 of the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided on the lower door mechanism DD is released, so that the switch cover DE2 cannot be operated with the power switch DE1. It is possible to switch from the closed state to the open state in which the power switch DE1 can be operated.
Thereby, while ensuring the operability of the power switch DE1 in a state where the lower door mechanism DD is opened, an unauthorized operation on the power supply device DE can be prevented to enhance security.

(18-2) In the present invention, in the gaming machine 1, the switch cover DE2 is switched between a closed state and an open state by sliding.
The convex portion DD25L1 has a convex shape,
When the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the moving path along which the switch cover DE2 slides is interrupted, so that the switch cover DE2 is prevented from sliding and opening.

According to the above configuration, by switching the switch cover DE2, it is possible to switch between the closed state and the open state. This makes it easy to access the power switch DE1 with the lower door mechanism DD opened.
Further, since the convex portion DD25L1 provided on the convex portion DD25L1 has a convex shape, the volume of the speaker DD25L itself can be increased, and the sound quality can be improved at the same time.

(13-1) The present invention provides the gaming machine 1, wherein the switch cover DE2 has an inclined surface DE2a,
The convex portion DD25L1 also has an inclined surface DD25La,
When the lower door mechanism DD is closed while the switch cover DE2 is in the open state, the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 comes into contact with and pushes the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2, and the switch cover DE2 is slid and closed. It is characterized by being in a state.

According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed when the switch cover DE2 is in the closed state, the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2 and the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 are arranged at positions facing each other. The slide of the cover DE2 can be regulated.
On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed while the switch cover DE2 is in the open state, the switch cover DE2 is at a position shifted from the closed state, and therefore the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 is The switch cover DE2 slides and moves to the closed position.
Accordingly, even if the lower door mechanism DD is closed while the switch cover DE2 is closed and the switch cover DE2 is closed, the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 is attached to the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2. The switch cover DE2 can be slid and moved to the closed position in conjunction with the operation of closing the lower door mechanism DD because the switch is pressed in contact with the lower door mechanism DD.

(19-1) a housing (cabinet G) having an opening (supply opening G31) formed on the back surface (rear wall G3) through which a supply path (medal supply port P) of the automatic circulation supply device can be inserted;
A shielding member (shielding member MH1) formed in a flat plate shape capable of shielding the opening from the inside of the housing and capable of being screwed and fixed to the rear surface in a shielding state in which the opening is shielded;
A guide portion for slidably guiding the shielding member (shielding member MH1) from the shielding state to an open state exposing the opening, and a holding portion (holding portion MH23a) capable of holding the shielding member in the open state. A guide member (guide member MH2) having
Is provided.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine is installed on an installation island of a game arcade. It is known that an automatic circulation replenishing device that replenishes a game machine such as a medal to a gaming machine is laid on such an installation island.

  In order to supply the game medium from the automatic circulation supply device, an opening is generally formed on the back surface of the game machine housing. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-212282, an automatic circulation replenishing device connection opening including four arc-shaped openings whose connection is interrupted by a cutting portion is formed on the back surface of the gaming machine. When installing a gaming machine on an installation island on which an automatic circulation replenishment device is laid, an opening is formed on the back of the housing by cutting the cut part and removing the inner blocking plate, and replenishment of the automatic circulation replenishment device A passage can be inserted through this opening. In the supply path, for example, an outlet is disposed above a hopper tank of a pachislot machine, and medals can be supplied to the hopper tank as appropriate.

  By the way, with respect to the installed gaming machines, change of the arrangement place and movement to a different game hall are generally performed. However, when the automatic circulation replenishing device is not laid on the installation island where the gaming machine is newly installed, the opening of the rear surface of the housing once formed is maintained in the above-described conventional gaming machine, so the opening is Could be used illegally. Therefore, when a game machine applied to an installation island where the automatic circulation replenishment device is laid is applied to an installation island where the automatic circulation replenishment device is not laid, there is a problem that security is reduced.

  According to the above configuration, the opening through which the supply path of the automatic circulation supply device can be inserted is formed on the rear surface of the housing, and this opening can be shielded by the shielding member. The sliding of the shielding member is guided between the shielding state and the open state by the guide member. The shielding member can be fixed to the rear surface of the housing by screwing in the shielding state, and is held by the guide member in the open state. Accordingly, when the gaming machine is installed on the installation island on which the automatic circulation replenishment device is laid, the shielding member is slid to the open state, and the supply path of the automatic circulation replenishment device is inserted into the opening on the back surface. At this time, since the shielding member is held by the holding portion, it is possible to prevent the shielding member from being lost. Further, when the gaming machine is moved, the opening can be shielded by sliding the shielding member and fixing it with the screw in the shielding state. As a result, after applying to the installation island where the automatic circulation and replenishment device is laid, even if the gaming machine is applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation and replenishment device is not laid, it is possible to cover the opening with the shielding member held. Security can be maintained.

(19-2) A housing (cabinet G) having an opening (supply opening G31) formed on the back surface (rear wall G3) through which a supply path (medal supply port P) of the automatic circulation supply device can be inserted;
The opening is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that can shield the opening from the inside of the housing, and can be screwed and fixed to the rear surface in a shielded state in which the opening is shielded. A shielding member (shielding member MH1) on which a protruding projection (projection MH12) is formed;
An upper edge (upper edge MH21) formed along the outer edge of the upper edge of the shielding member in the shielding state and configured to restrict the vertically upward movement of the shielding member; Two side edges (side edges MH22, MH22) formed along the side edges of the shielding member in the shielding state in a vertically downward direction from the one end, and the other end of the two side edges A guide groove (guide groove MH23b) is formed on the back side for connecting the shield members and sliding the shield member in the vertical direction, and a lower edge for supporting the protrusion of the shield member on the upper surface and holding the shield member. A guide member (guide member MH2) having a portion (lower edge portion 23, holding portion MH23a);
Is provided.

  According to the above configuration, the opening through which the supply path of the automatic circulation supply device can be inserted is formed on the rear surface of the housing, and this opening can be shielded by the shielding member. The sliding of the shielding member is guided between a shielding state and an open state by a guide groove formed in a lower edge portion of the guide member. In addition, since the sliding of the shielding member is restricted from moving vertically upward by the upper edge of the guide member, and the movement in the horizontal direction is restricted by the two side edges and the lower edge, It is possible to prevent the shield member from coming off the guide member when sliding. The shielding member can be fixed to the rear surface of the housing by screwing in the shielding state, and is held by the guide member in the open state. Accordingly, when the gaming machine is installed on the installation island on which the automatic circulation replenishment device is laid, the shielding member is slid to the open state, and the supply path of the automatic circulation replenishment device is inserted into the opening on the back surface. At this time, since the shielding member is held by the holding portion, it is possible to prevent the shielding member from being lost. Further, when the gaming machine is moved, the opening can be shielded by sliding the shielding member and fixing it with the screw in the shielding state. As a result, after applying to the installation island where the automatic circulation and replenishment device is laid, even if the gaming machine is applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation and replenishment device is not laid, it is possible to cover the opening with the shielding member held. Security can be maintained.

(19-3) The projecting portion of the shielding member projects more than the lower edge holding the shielding member.

  According to the above configuration, the protruding portion can be easily grasped, and it is possible to easily shift from the open state to the closed state.

  Conventionally, in order to prevent medals from overflowing from a hopper device or an auxiliary storage, a medal overflow prevention member such as a guide member is provided, and medals flowing from the selector to the hopper device, and an auxiliary storage from the hopper device. There is known a gaming machine that prevents medals flowing to overflow from a hopper device and an auxiliary storage (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-188397). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a problem that overflowed medals accumulate inside the gaming machine and interfere with other electronic devices or movable members.

  However, in recent years, there has been a new flow of medals other than the above-described flow of medals, such as when medals are automatically replenished from the outside.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and provides a gaming machine that can prevent medals from overflowing from a hopper device or the like even when medals are supplied from the outside. The purpose is to:

(20-1) One aspect of the present invention relates to a cabinet G,
A medal supply mechanism MH provided on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and receiving a thin metal medal into the interior of the cabinet G;
A hopper mechanism HP having a bucket HP1 for storing medals received from the medal supply mechanism MH;
A coin disposed below the medal supply mechanism MH and provided from the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G to the bucket HP1 so as to fill a gap HPG between the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. Guard HP30,
A gaming machine 1 comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the coin guard HP30 is provided so as to fill the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. Even if it overflows from HP1, it can be prevented from entering into the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. Thus, it is possible to prevent the overflowing medals from accumulating in the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP and interfering with other electronic devices or movable members.

(20-2) The present invention provides the gaming machine 1 with an overflow bucket OF provided at a predetermined distance from the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G and for storing medals overflowing from the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP,
The coin guard HP30 is an L-shaped combination of a first guard HP301 provided from the back wall G3 of the cabinet G to the bucket HP1 and a second guard HP302 provided from the overflow bucket OF to the bucket HP1. And is inclined so as to fall toward the bucket HP1.

According to the above configuration, the coin guard HP30 can also be arranged between the overflow bucket OF and the bucket HP1. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the medals from overflowing between the overflow bucket OF and the bucket HP1.
Further, even when a medal rides on the coin guard HP30, the medal slides down to the bucket HP1 side due to its own weight because the medal is inclined toward the bucket HP1, and the medal can be normally stored in the hopper mechanism HP. .

  DESCRIPTION OF RELATED ART Conventionally, as shown in Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-1554, when the hopper (coin payout apparatus) which can accommodate several coins is slidably installed in a housing, the connector provided behind the hopper is mounted on the housing. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine that can be electrically connected to a connector provided inside a body is known. According to such a gaming machine, the physical installation of the hopper on the housing and the electrical connection can be performed simultaneously, so that the work efficiency of installation, replacement and inspection of the hopper can be improved.

  However, if the hopper is slid at a shifted position when the hopper is slid inside the housing, the connector provided behind the hopper may contact the back plate of the housing and be damaged. There is.

  In this regard, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-1554, a guide rail that guides the hopper to slide is provided, but when the hopper slides in a hurry, the slide is installed without being correctly guided by the guide unit. In some cases, the connector cannot be sufficiently protected by the guide portion alone.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a hopper can be normally slid and set inside a housing.

(21-1) The gaming machine 1 according to the present invention, in which a connector HP41 provided on the back of the hopper mechanism HP is connected to a connector G81 provided on the back side of the cabinet G,
A pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP;
It is provided on the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G and has an upper portion HG121 / HG131 and a lower portion HG123 / HG133. A pair of guide pieces HP21 / HP22 is sandwiched between the upper portion HG121 / HG131 and the lower portion HG123 / HG133. A pair of guide rails HG12 and HG13 capable of guiding the hopper mechanism HP so as to be slidable in the depth direction of the cabinet G in a state where they are engaged with each other;
Projecting portions HG124 and HG134 provided above the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and forward of the connector HP41;
Is a gaming machine 1 having

According to the above configuration, when the hopper mechanism HP is slid and installed on the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G, the pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP are connected to the upper portions of the guide rails HG12 and HG13. If the HG121 / HG131 and the lower portions HG123 / HG133 are not sandwiched between the HG121 / HG131 and the upper portions HG121 / HG131 of the guide rails HG12 / HG13 and are slid upward by mistake, the guide pieces HP21 / HP22 are moved by the guide rails. By contacting the protrusions HG124 and HG134 provided above the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the HG12 and HG13, it is possible to prevent the hopper mechanism HP from being slid and installed at an incorrect position. That is, the hopper mechanism HP can be normally slid and installed inside the cabinet G.
Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the hopper mechanism HP from being slid and installed at an incorrect position, and the hopper mechanism HP from coming into contact with the connector G81 to damage the connector G81.

  (21-2) The gaming machine according to the present invention is characterized in that the portions of the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 which are arranged in front of the cabinet G are tapered.

  According to the above configuration, when the hopper mechanism HP is engaged with the guide rails HG12 and HG13, it is possible to prevent the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 from contacting the hopper mechanism HP.

  (21-3) In the present invention, the lower portions HG123 and HG133, the upper portions HG121 and HG131, and the projecting portions HG124 and HG134 of the pair of guide rails HG12 and HG13 are integrally formed by bending a single plate. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the above configuration, the lower portions HG123 and HG133, the upper portions HG121 and HG131, and the projecting portions HG124 and HG134 of the pair of guide rails HG12 and HG13 can be formed by one plate. Thus, the manufacturing process can be simplified.

  (21-4) Since the protruding portions HG124 and HG134 are on the back side of the cabinet G, when the hopper mechanism HP is temporarily placed around the guide rails HG12 and HG13 as a preparation stage for engaging with the guide rails HG12 and HG13. Can be kept out of the way.

  (21-5) Since the flat space HG17 is provided in front of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 of the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 of the hopper mechanism HP are placed in the flat space HG17. As a preparation stage before engaging with the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the hopper mechanism HP can be temporarily placed. Thereby, the hopper mechanism HP can be slidably installed on the bottom of the cabinet G with ease.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a control board for performing control relating to a lottery or an effect associated with a game is disposed at an upper portion of a housing, and a hopper device for handling medals is disposed at a lower portion of the housing (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-188395). No.). According to such a gaming machine, since there is a distance between the control board and the hopper device, it is possible to prevent medals from physically contacting the control board, and to reduce the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between medals. Can be smaller.

  However, in recent years, in order to simplify replacement and recycling of components, the operation device, the effect device, and the like are often unitized and arranged at the upper part of the housing. Then, for the sake of design, there is a case where the control board is arranged at the lower part of the housing and the distance between the control board and the hopper device becomes short.

  As a result, since the distance between the control board and the hopper device becomes short, medals may physically contact the control board, or the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between medals may increase.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and even when the distance between the control board and the hopper device is short, the medal physically contacts the control board. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the occurrence of medals and reduce the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between medals.

(22-1) One aspect of the present invention relates to a cabinet G having an upper space and a lower space,
A display unit A provided in the upper space;
A sub-control device SS that is arranged on the back side of the lower space and controls a game,
A hopper mechanism HP arranged in the lower space, on the front side of the sub-control device SS, for storing metal medals;
A sheet metal BK provided between the sub control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP;
With
The sub-control device SS is the gaming machine 1 characterized by being sandwiched between a rear wall G3 of a lower space and a sheet metal BK.

According to the above configuration, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, even if a medal flows into the hopper mechanism HP and jumps out to the sub-control device SS, the sheet metal BK is provided. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the medal from physically contacting the sub-control device SS. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between metal medals in the hopper mechanism HP can be prevented by the sheet metal BK.
Further, since the sub-control device SS is provided on the back side of the lower space and is sandwiched between the rear wall G3 of the lower space and the sheet metal BK, the sub-control device SS must be removed from the cabinet G unless the sheet metal BK is removed. Can not be removed. This enhances the security of the sub-control device SS.

  (22-2) Since the sheet metal BK is connected to the metal frame of the gaming machine 1, it emits radiation due to the contact of the medals with the sheet metal BK and radiation due to the contact between the metal medals due to the drop of the medals. It can be grounded via a metal frame.

  Conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-12239, a button unit provided with a locking portion that is elastically deformed on a side surface so as to be attachable from the front to an opening of a front door is provided. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine has been known in which a button unit is provided with a flange portion larger than the opening to fill a gap between the button unit and the opening. In such a gaming machine, the button unit can be easily fitted into the opening from the front surface by utilizing the elastic deformation of the locking portion. In addition, since the flange portion fills the gap between the button unit and the opening, it is possible to insert a wire or the like from the gap to elastically deform the locking portion, thereby preventing an unauthorized act of removing the button unit.

  However, there is a case where the button unit cannot be sufficiently fixed to the front door simply by elastically deforming and fixing the locking portion to the back of the front door. In addition, the appearance may be impaired by exposing the flange portion to the outside (front door).

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine in which a button can be firmly fixed to a housing.

(23-1) One aspect of the present invention relates to a cabinet G,
A second pedestal portion DD2b provided on the cabinet G and a maximum BET button DD8 attached via an opening DD2ba formed on the second pedestal portion DD2b;
With
The maximum BET button DD8 is
An operation unit DD81 disposed outside the cabinet G with respect to the opening DD2ba, and having communication holes DD816a and DD816b and screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b, and having a flange DD8111 larger than the opening DD2ba;
A locking portion DD82 which is arranged on the inner side of the cabinet G with respect to the opening DD2ba, has communication holes DD826a and DD826b, and has a flange DD823 larger than the opening DD2ba;
The gaming machine 1 is provided with communication holes DD826a and DD826b, communication holes DD816a and DD816b, and screws DD83a and DD83b that are connected to and screwed into the screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b.

  According to the above configuration, the operating portion DD81 and the locking portion DD82 are opened by the screws DD83a and DD83b that connect and screw together with the communication holes DD826a and DD826b, the communication holes DD816a and DD816b, and the screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b. It can be fixed to the second pedestal part DD2b via the part DD2ba. In addition, since the operation unit DD81 has a shape portion larger than the opening DD2ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from dropping from the outside of the opening DD2ba to the inside of the cabinet G. Further, since the locking portion DD82 also has the flange DD823 larger than the opening DD2ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from going out of the cabinet G from inside the opening DD2ba. Thereby, the maximum BET button DD8 can be fixed to the second pedestal portion DD2b.

(23-2) In the present invention, in the gaming machine 1, the operation unit DD81 includes:
A button base DD811 having through holes DD811a and DD811b,
A first member DD812 slidable through the through holes DD811a and DD811b by pressing;
A spring DD813 for returning the DD812 pushed in by the pressing to the initial position,
The shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 is the same as the shape of the upper surface of the button base DD811.

According to the above configuration, since the shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 and the shape of the upper surface of the button base DD811 are the same, when the first member DD812 is viewed from above, the button base DD811 is moved by the first member DD812. It can be hidden and only the first member DD812 pressed by the player can be shown outside. Thereby, the appearance of the maximum BET button DD8 can be simplified, and the design of the appearance of the gaming machine 1 can be enhanced.
Also, since the shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 and the shape of the top surface of the button base DD811 are the same, the button shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 is smaller than that of the button base DD811. A structure that can easily prevent unauthorized intrusion from a gap between the through holes DD811a and DD811b of the base DD811 can be provided.

(24-1) A symbol display means (reel device) including a reel (reel RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and capable of performing variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reel. RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 or the like) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by a player;
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected, the reel is rotated to change and display the symbols arranged on the reel by changing the reel. Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by a player;
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying the symbols arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Reel position specifying means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114, etc.) for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel from the reference position due to rotation;
A detection piece (detection piece RU1112) that rotates along a predetermined circumference (circumference RUD) with the rotation of the reel;
A sensor (sensor unit RU112) having one point on the circumference (detection point RUP) as a detection position,
Reference position specifying means (main control board MS or the like) for specifying whether or not the reel has reached a reference position based on detection of the detection piece by the sensor;
With
The reference position specifying unit sets a position of the reel when detecting that the detection piece has changed from a state where the detection piece is not detected to a state where the detection piece is detected as a first reference position, and the detection piece is detected. The position of the reel when detecting that the state has been changed from the state to the undetected state is defined as a second reference position,
The detection piece is continuously detected by the sensor until the position of the reel reaches the second reference position after the first reference position.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on respective surfaces, game medals, coins, etc. (“medals, etc.”) have been inserted, and it has been detected that a player has operated a start lever, and a plurality of reels have been detected. A start switch for requesting the start of rotation of the reel and a signal for requesting a stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel are detected by detecting that a player has pressed a stop button provided for each of the plurality of reels. A stop switch for controlling the operation of the motor based on signals output from the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit for rotating and stopping each reel, and detecting that the start lever has been operated, based on a random number value. A so-called pachi-slot game machine that stops reel rotation based on the result of the lottery (“internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected. Have been.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine using a stepping motor as a motor for driving the rotation of a reel is known (see JP-A-2006-263284). In such a gaming machine, a detection piece (reel index) is provided at a specific portion of the reel, and the reel position can be calculated based on the number of times the pulse is output based on the detection of the reel index. . By calculating the position of the reel using such a method, it is not necessary to provide the number of detecting pieces corresponding to the symbols, and the cost can be reduced.

  However, the position of the reel calculated while the detection piece is not detected is a theoretical position obtained based on the number of times of output of the pulse, and when an irregular operation such as stopping the reel with bare hands occurs. May not always match the actual reel position.

  According to the above configuration, the detection piece that rotates along the predetermined circumference with the rotation of the reel is continuously detected by the sensor whose detection position is one point on the circumference. Then, the first reference position is specified by detecting that the detection piece has changed from the non-detection state to the detection state (so-called on-edge), and the detection is performed from the state in which the detection piece is detected. The second reference position is specified by detecting the change to the non-existent state (so-called off-edge). Therefore, during one rotation of the reel, it is possible to perform detection twice when the reel position becomes the first reference position and when the reel position becomes the second reference position. As described above, since the detection is performed twice during one rotation of the reel, the time until the stop operation becomes effective after the rotation speed of the reel reaches the theoretically specified speed (after the acceleration processing is completed). Can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that it is not possible to perform one-round pressing due to the relationship between the position of the design to be pressed and the position of the detection piece, and as a result, the unevenness of the timing at which the stop operation becomes effective is reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling inconvenience during the stop operation.

(24-2) the first reference position and the second reference position are opposed to each other on a straight line passing through the center axis of the reel with the center axis interposed therebetween;
The sensing piece includes an area on the circumferential path from a position corresponding to the first reference position to a position corresponding to the second reference position along the circumferential path, and the second reference position Has a shape that does not include an area extending from the position corresponding to the first reference position along the circumferential path to the position corresponding to the first reference position.

  According to the above configuration, even if only one sensor is provided, it is possible to perform detection twice while the reel makes one rotation, and the same effect as when two sensors are provided is obtained. Can be That is, without increasing the number of sensors, it is possible to reduce the possibility that one round push cannot be performed due to the relationship between the position of the design to be pushed and the position of the detection piece.

(25-1) A symbol display means (reel) provided with a plurality of reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and capable of performing variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reel. Device RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 or the like) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by a player;
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected, the reel is rotated to change and display the symbols arranged on the reel by changing the reel. Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by a player;
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying the symbols arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Illumination means (backlight RR4 or the like) for illuminating the symbol stopped and displayed on the symbol display means from behind.
A support plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for supporting the reel is disposed between two adjacent reels among the plurality of reels,
The front portion of the support plate is formed in a substantially arcuate shape in a side view.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on respective surfaces, game medals, coins, etc. (“medals, etc.”) have been inserted, and it has been detected that a player has operated a start lever, and a plurality of reels have been detected. A start switch for requesting the start of rotation of the reel and a signal for requesting a stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel are detected by detecting that a player has pressed a stop button provided for each of the plurality of reels. A step switch motor that is provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels and transmits each driving force to each reel, and controls the operation of the stepping motor based on signals output by a start switch and a stop switch. And a reel control unit for controlling the rotation of each reel and stopping the reel. Then, a lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery (“internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected. A so-called gaming machine is known.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine provided with a back lamp for irradiating a symbol from the inside of a reel (see JP-A-2009-178268). According to such a gaming machine, when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it is possible to give the effect to the symbol itself, such as highlighting the symbol constituting the symbol combination.

  However, generally, in a gaming machine, since a plurality of reels are provided adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction, lights of the back lamps irradiating adjacent reels interfere with each other, and a good effect is produced. There was a problem that we could not expect.

  According to the above configuration, the support plate that supports the reel is disposed between two adjacent reels, and a front portion of the support plate is formed in a substantially arcuate shape in a side view. Therefore, since the support plate has a shape protruding forward as compared with a support plate having a rectangular shape in a side view, the support plate has a function as a partition plate. Light can be prevented from reaching adjacent reels. Moreover, the function as the partition plate is not provided simply by simply increasing the size of the support plate, but such a function is provided by forming the front portion of the support plate into a substantially arcuate shape in a side view. Therefore, the support plate does not stand out from the appearance of the player, and it is possible to prevent the appearance of the gaming machine from being spoiled.

  The support plate has a front portion having a substantially arcuate shape in a side view, and a rear portion having a shape (for example, a substantially rectangular shape in a side view) continuously formed from both ends of an arc defining the bow shape in a side view toward the rear. Unit. Note that the bow shape is a figure surrounded by an arc and a chord connecting the ends of the arc.

  Further, the support plate may directly support the reel, or may indirectly support the reel via another member. For example, the support plate may be a motor mounting plate for mounting a motor (stepping motor) for driving the reel to rotate.

(25-2) A symbol display means (reel) provided with a plurality of reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and capable of performing a variable display and a stop display of the symbols arranged on the reel. Device RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 or the like) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by a player;
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected, the reel is rotated to change and display the symbols arranged on the reel by changing the reel. Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by a player;
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying the symbols arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Illumination means (backlight RR4 or the like) for illuminating the symbol stopped and displayed on the symbol display means from behind.
A support plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for supporting the reel is disposed between two adjacent reels among the plurality of reels,
The front portion of the support plate is formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view.

  According to the above configuration, the support plate that supports the reel is disposed between two adjacent reels, and a front portion of the support plate is formed to have substantially the same shape as the reel in side view. Therefore, since the support plate has a shape protruding forward as compared with a support plate having a rectangular shape in a side view, the support plate has a function as a partition plate. Light can be prevented from reaching adjacent reels. Moreover, the function as a partition plate is not provided by simply increasing the size of the support plate, but such a function is provided by forming the front portion of the support plate in substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view. As a result, the support plate does not stand out from the appearance of the player, and the appearance of the gaming machine can be prevented from being impaired.

  The front portion of the support plate, which is formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in side view, has substantially the same size as the opposing reel portion, and it is desirable that both portions overlap. That is, when viewed from one side, the front portion of the support plate is substantially completely covered by the reel, and when viewed from the other side, the portion of the reel facing the portion is substantially covered by the front portion of the support plate. Desirably, it is completely covered. Thus, it is possible to achieve a good balance between providing the support plate with a function as a partition plate and maintaining the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine.

  For example, the support plate is formed in a substantially semicircular front portion overlapping the front half of the reel in a side view, and continuously formed from both ends of an arc defining the semicircle in a side view toward the rear. And a rear portion having a shape (for example, a substantially rectangular shape in side view).

(26-1) A symbol display means (reel device) including a reel (reel RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and capable of performing variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reel. RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 or the like) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by a player;
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected, the reel is rotated to change and display the symbols arranged on the reel by changing the reel. Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by a player;
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying the symbols arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Reel position specifying means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114, etc.) for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel from the reference position due to rotation;
A detection piece (detection piece RU1112) that rotates along a predetermined circumference with the rotation of the reel;
A sensor (sensor RU1121) for detecting the detection piece,
Reference position specifying means (main control board MS or the like) for specifying whether or not the reel has reached a reference position based on detection of the detection piece by the sensor;
With
The sensor is mounted on a motor mounting plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for mounting a motor that rotationally drives the reel via a base member (base member RU1122),
A screw insertion portion (screw hole RU11c / screw hole RU11d) into which a screw (screw RU1124a / RU1124b) for fastening the pedestal member to the motor mounting plate can be inserted into the first predetermined portion and the motor mounting plate. 2 is provided at a predetermined location and at two locations on a second straight line (straight line RUDB) substantially perpendicular to a first straight line (straight line RUDA) connecting the first predetermined location and the second predetermined location. And positioning insertion portions (fitting holes RU11e and RU11f) are provided at a third predetermined location and a fourth predetermined location located on opposite sides of the first straight line as boundaries.
The pedestal member is provided with positioning projections (projections RU1122j and RU1122k) that can be inserted into the positioning insertion portions provided at the two locations.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on respective surfaces, game medals, coins, etc. (“medals, etc.”) have been inserted, and it has been detected that a player has operated a start lever, and a plurality of reels have been detected. A start switch for requesting the start of rotation of the reel and a signal for requesting a stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel are detected by detecting that a player has pressed a stop button provided for each of the plurality of reels. A step switch motor that is provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels and transmits each driving force to each reel, and controls the operation of the stepping motor based on signals output by a start switch and a stop switch. And a reel control unit for controlling the rotation of each reel and stopping the reel. Then, a lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery (“internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected. A so-called gaming machine is known.

  In such a gaming machine, a reel index that rotates coaxially with the reel is provided in order to accurately control the rotation of the reel (see JP-A-2006-263284). The reel index rotates along a predetermined circumference, and the passage of the reel index is detected by a sensor whose detection position is one point on this rotation path. Then, the position at which the reel index is detected is set as the reel reference position, and the reel position is calculated based on this reference position and the number of excitation steps of the stepping motor.

  By the way, the conventional sensor for detecting the reel index is generally provided on a motor mounting plate on which a motor of the reel is mounted via a base member. Thereby, the sensor is arranged near the rotation path of the reel index. However, if the pedestal member is not accurately positioned on the motor mounting plate, erroneous determination of a game result determined based on the reel stop position or damage to the gaming machine due to contact between the sensor and the reel index may occur. There was a risk of doing so.

  According to the above configuration, when the motor mounting plate and the pedestal member are mounted, the positioning projection of the pedestal member is inserted into the positioning insertion portions at the third predetermined position and the fourth predetermined position of the motor mounting plate. The pedestal member can be positioned with respect to the mounting plate, and the screw is inserted into the screw insertion portion in the positioned state, and the motor mounting plate and the pedestal member are screwed and fixed. The position of the pedestal member with respect to the motor mounting plate is regulated at four places of two screw insertion portions and two positioning insertion portions, and further, a first straight line connecting the two screw insertion portions, and two positioning insertion portions. Are set to be perpendicular to the second straight line connecting. Thus, it is possible to prevent the position of the pedestal member from being shifted with respect to the motor mounting plate. Furthermore, since the screwing is performed only at two places of the two screw inserting portions, the mounting operation can be simplified. As a result, the mounting of the pedestal member to the motor mounting plate can be easily and accurately positioned and performed, and erroneous determination of a game result and damage to the gaming machine can be prevented.

(26-2) The positioning insertion portion provided at one of the third predetermined location and the fourth predetermined location is formed in a long hole shape whose longitudinal direction is the second linear direction. .

  According to the above configuration, one of the two positioning insertion portions arranged on the second straight line is formed in a long hole shape whose longitudinal direction is the second linear direction. Thereby, an error in the interval in forming the two positioning projections on the pedestal member can be allowed.

  The positioning insertion portion has a longitudinal direction substantially perpendicular to a tangential direction of rotation of the detection piece at the detection position of the sensor.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the reference position of the reel by the sensor even if a positional deviation from the base member occurs in the fitting hole having the longitudinal direction.

(27-1) A symbol display means (reel device) including a reel (reel RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and capable of performing variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reel. RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 or the like) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by a player;
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected, the reel is rotated to change and display the symbols arranged on the reel by changing the reel. Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by a player;
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying the symbols arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Reel position specifying means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114, etc.) for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel from the reference position due to rotation;
A detecting piece that rotates along a predetermined circumference with the rotation of the reel,
A sensor (sensor RU1121) for detecting the detection piece,
Reference position specifying means (main control board MS or the like) for specifying whether or not the reel has reached a reference position based on detection of the detection piece by the sensor;
With
The reel position specifying means,
The sensor is mounted on a motor mounting plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for mounting a motor that rotationally drives the reel via a base member (base member RU1122),
A screw insertion portion (screw hole RU1122c / screw hole RU1122d) into which a screw (screw RU1123a / RU1123b) for fastening the sensor to the pedestal member can be inserted into the pedestal member at a first predetermined position and a second predetermined position. And two locations on a second straight line (straight line RUDD) substantially perpendicular to a first straight line (straight line RUDC) connecting the first predetermined place and the second predetermined place, Positioning protrusions (projections RU1122e and RU1122f) are provided at a third predetermined position and a fourth predetermined position on the side where the sensor detects the detection piece with respect to the first straight line,
The sensor is provided with positioning insertion portions (fitting holes RU1124e and RU1124f) into which the positioning projections provided at the two locations can be inserted.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on respective surfaces, game medals, coins, etc. (“medals, etc.”) have been inserted, and it has been detected that a player has operated a start lever, and a plurality of reels have been detected. A start switch for requesting the start of rotation of the reel and a signal for requesting a stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel are detected by detecting that a player has pressed a stop button provided for each of the plurality of reels. A step switch motor that is provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels and transmits each driving force to each reel, and controls the operation of the stepping motor based on signals output by a start switch and a stop switch. And a reel control unit for controlling the rotation of each reel and stopping the reel. Then, a lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery (“internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected. A so-called gaming machine is known.

  In such a gaming machine, a reel index that rotates coaxially with the reel is provided in order to accurately control the rotation of the reel (see JP-A-2006-263284). The reel index rotates along a predetermined circumference, and the passage of the reel index is detected by a sensor whose detection position is one point on this rotation path. Then, the position at which the reel index is detected is set as the reel reference position, and the reel position is calculated based on this reference position and the number of excitation steps of the stepping motor.

  By the way, the conventional sensor for detecting the reel index is generally provided on a motor mounting plate on which a motor of the reel is mounted via a base member. Thereby, the sensor is arranged near the rotation path of the reel index. However, if the sensor is not accurately positioned on the pedestal member, there is a possibility that the game machine may be damaged due to erroneous determination of a game result determined based on the reel stop position or contact between the sensor and the reel index. was there.

  According to the above configuration, at the time of mounting the pedestal member and the sensor, the positioning projections at the third predetermined location and the fourth predetermined location of the pedestal member are inserted into the positioning insertion portion of the sensor, whereby the sensor of the sensor with respect to the pedestal member is mounted. Positioning can be performed, and the screw is inserted into the screw insertion portion in the positioned state, and the pedestal member and the sensor are screwed and fixed. The position of the sensor with respect to the pedestal member is regulated at four places: two screw insertion portions and two positioning protrusions, and further connects a first straight line connecting the two screw insertion portions and the two positioning insertion portions. It is set so that the second straight line is perpendicular to the second straight line. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the position of the sensor with respect to the pedestal member. Furthermore, since the screwing is performed only at two places of the two screw inserting portions, the mounting operation can be simplified. As a result, the attachment of the sensor to the pedestal member can be easily and accurately positioned and performed, and erroneous determination of a game result and damage to the gaming machine can be prevented.

(27-2)
The screw insertion portion provided at one of the first predetermined portion and the second predetermined portion is formed in a long hole shape whose longitudinal direction is the first linear direction.

  According to the above configuration, one of the two screw insertion portions arranged on the first straight line is formed in an elongated hole shape whose longitudinal direction is the first linear direction. Thereby, an error in the interval in forming the two screwing locations in the sensor can be allowed.

  DESCRIPTION OF RELATED ART Conventionally, as disclosed in Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-245279, the game machine provided with the locking member attached after attaching a button unit and preventing unauthorized removal of a button unit is known. According to such a gaming machine, by attaching the locking member to the existing button unit, unauthorized removal of the button unit can be prevented without changing the existing button unit.

  However, installing a new additional component to prevent unauthorized removal of the button unit requires securing a storage space for the additional component in the gaming machine, which may not be easy to apply. .

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent unauthorized removal of a button unit while suppressing an increase in the size of components. I do.

(28-1) One aspect of the present invention provides a button base DD811 having through holes DD811a and DD811b,
A first member DD812 slidable through the through holes DD811a and DD811b by pressing;
A spring DD813 for returning the first member DD812 pushed in by the pressing to the initial position,
A photosensor DD814 having a light emitting unit DD814a and a light receiving unit DD814b,
A second member DD815 having a light-shielding piece DD8151 that blocks between the light-emitting part DD814a and the light-receiving part DD814b of the photosensor DD814;
A maximum BET button DD8 having
The second member DD815 is
It has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b,
The gaming machine 1 is characterized in that the gaming machine 1 is attached to a portion of the first member DD812 that extends from the through holes DD811a and DD811b.

According to the above configuration, the second member DD815 has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b provided in the button base DD811, and is attached to a part of the first member DD812 extending from the through holes DD811a and DD811b. Have been. Accordingly, the second member DD815 can prevent the first member DD812 from coming out of the through holes DD811a and DD811b, and can prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from being illegally removed.
In addition, since other members are not used, it is possible to suppress an increase in the size of components.

(28-2) The present invention provides the gaming machine 1, wherein the button base DD811 is formed with two through holes DD811a and DD811b,
The first member DD812 has two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b that can slide through the two through holes DD811a and DD811b,
The second member DD815 is attached so as to connect between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the two through holes DD811a and DD811b. The light shielding piece DD8151 is connected to the two through holes of the second member DD815. It is characterized in that it is provided at an intermediate portion between two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the holes DD811a and DD811b.

  According to the above configuration, the light-shielding piece DD8151 slides the two through holes DD811a and DD811b of the button base DD811 by the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b interlocking with the pressing of the first member DD812 by the player. A light-shielding piece DD8151 provided at an intermediate portion of a second member DD815 attached between two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the two through-holes DD811a and DD811b serves as a light-emitting portion DD814a and a light-receiving portion DD814b. It can be cut off across the space.

  (28-3) Since the first member DD812 has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b, the first member DD812 is prevented from coming out of the through holes DD811a and DD811b toward the second member DD815. In addition, unauthorized removal of the maximum BET button DD8 can be further prevented.

  Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-44199, there has been known a gaming machine in which a front door is separated into an upper door and a lower door, and each can be opened and closed. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to open and close only necessary portions when supplying medals (opening and closing the lower door) and when adjusting the mechanical reel (opening and closing the upper door). Can be prevented (improved security).

  By the way, in recent years, unitization of operation devices, effect devices, and the like has been performed in order to simplify the recycling of gaming machine parts and the like.

  Here, for example, the effect device unitized may be stored in a space on the housing side corresponding to the upper door. By doing so, it is possible to easily replace the effect device at the time of model change or recycling.

  However, when the unitized effect device is large, the upper door (or the lower door) may be in the way when changing models or recycling.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly take in and out a device housed inside the gaming machine.

(29-1) One of the present inventions
Cabinet G has shaft portions UH21 and UH22, and engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24,
The upper door mechanism DU that can be opened and closed with respect to the cabinet G is
Bearing portions UH121 and UH131 that are rotatably superimposed on the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and are slidable with respect to the axis UH121A of the shaft portions UH21 and UH22;
Until the upper door mechanism DU opens at a predetermined angle with respect to the cabinet G, the upper door mechanism DU engages with the engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24 to regulate the sliding of the bearing portions UH121 and UH131. Engagement convex portions UH15 and UH16 that are released from engagement with the engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24 when opened to a predetermined angle or more,
A gaming machine 1 characterized by having:

According to the above configuration, until the upper door mechanism DU opens at a predetermined angle with respect to the cabinet G, the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 engage with the engaging concave portions UH23 and UH24, and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are pivoted. It restricts sliding along the axis UH121A of the sections UH21 and UH22. Accordingly, the release of the overlap between the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 can be restricted, and the removal of the upper door mechanism DU from the cabinet G can be locked.
On the other hand, when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G, the engagement of the engagement convex portions UH15 and UH16 with the engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24 is released, and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are disengaged from the shaft portion UH21. -It is possible to slide along the axis UH121A of UH22. As a result, the overlap between the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 is released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G.
That is, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G only when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G.

  (29-2) The present invention provides the gaming machine 1, wherein the upper door mechanism DU is in a closed state when the upper door mechanism DU is closed with respect to the cabinet G, and is in an open state when the upper door mechanism DU is 90 ° opened with respect to the cabinet G. The predetermined angle is larger than the angle of the upper door mechanism DU in the closed state and smaller than 90 ° which is the angle of the upper door mechanism DU in the open state.

  According to the above configuration, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G without opening the upper door mechanism DU to the open state (90 ° opening).

(30-1) a door capable of opening and closing the front side of the housing;
A left end light emitting mechanism that is disposed at the left end of the door and guides and emits light to the left end region of the door,
A right end light emitting mechanism disposed at the right end of the door and guiding light to the right end area of the door to emit light,
A central light-emitting substrate that is arranged at the center of the door and emits light,
A light guiding mechanism for guiding the light emitted from the central light emitting substrate to at least one of a left peripheral region on the left end region side and a right peripheral region on the right end region side.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of performing an effect by operating a movable body (see JP-A-2009-178268). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only with the image or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body. In recent years, it has been required to provide a plurality of such effect devices to further enhance the effect. Generally, a gaming machine is installed side by side on an installation island in a game arcade, so the size of the gaming machine is limited. However, when a plurality of effect devices are provided, there is a possibility that a sufficient space for a configuration including a reflector and a light transmitting plate for effecting light by a conventional LED may not be obtained. According to the above configuration, the light emitted from the central light emitting substrate is guided by the light guide mechanism to at least one of the left peripheral area and the left peripheral area, so that light is hardly guided by the left end light emitting mechanism or the right end light emitting mechanism. Light can be emitted also in the region. Thereby, even if it is a door in a limited space, it is possible to produce light at a plurality of places with a higher effect.

(30-2) The central light emitting substrate is provided with an upper light source and a lower light source on an upper surface and a lower surface, respectively.
An upper light guide mechanism that guides light from the upper light source to a position separated from the central portion, and a lower light guide mechanism that guides light from the lower light source to a position separated from the central portion. Have.

  According to the above configuration, the upper light source on the upper surface and the lower light source on the lower surface of the central light emitting substrate can cause the left peripheral region and the right peripheral region to emit light by the upper light guiding mechanism and the lower light guiding mechanism, The left peripheral area and the right peripheral area can be expanded to a wider range and place. Thereby, even if it is a door in a limited space, it is possible to produce light at a plurality of places with a higher effect.

(30-3) a door (upper door mechanism UD) capable of opening and closing the front side of the housing;
A left end light emitting mechanism HA2 that is disposed at a left end of the door and causes the left end region of the door to emit light in a planar shape;
A right end light emitting mechanism HA3 that is arranged at the right end of the door and emits light in a plane at the right end area of the door;
A central light emitting mechanism HA4 arranged at the center of the door,
The central light emitting mechanism,
A central light-emitting substrate (LED substrate HA411 in the top lens) in which an upper light source and a lower light source are respectively provided on the upper surface and the lower surface;
An upper light guide mechanism (left light guide lens HA413, right light guide lens HA414) that guides light from the upper light source provided on the upper surface of the central light emitting substrate to an upper light guide region and emits light in a planar shape;
A lower light guide mechanism (right downlight lens HA415, left downlight lens) that guides light from the lower light source provided on the lower surface of the central light emitting substrate to a lower light guide region to emit light in a planar shape. And

  According to the above configuration, the central light-emitting substrate of the central light-emitting mechanism has an upper light source and a lower light source on the upper surface and the lower surface, respectively, and these light sources are formed by the upper light-guiding mechanism and the lower light-guiding mechanism, respectively. The lower light guide region emits light in a planar manner. Thereby, in addition to the left end area by the left end light emitting mechanism and the right end area by the right end light emitting mechanism, the upper light guide area and the lower light guide area can be made to emit light by one central light emitting mechanism. Even in the case of a door, it is possible to produce light at a plurality of locations with a higher effect.

(30-4) The upper light guide mechanism and the lower light guide mechanism are arranged symmetrically about the center light emitting substrate.

  According to the above configuration, since the upper light guide region and the lower light guide region exist symmetrically with respect to the center light emitting substrate, even in the door of the limited space, the effect of light at a plurality of locations can be obtained. , Can be performed with a higher effect.

(30-5) The upper light guide mechanism includes an upper reflector (a reflector HA412 in the top lens, a hiding member HA16 in the LED lens in the top lens) that covers the upper surface of the central light emitting substrate and the upper light source, and the upper reflector and the center. An upper light-guiding lens (left light-guiding lens HA413, right light-guiding lens HA414) arranged on the right and left sides of the gap with the light-emitting substrate, and arranged up to the upper light-guiding region;
The lower light guide mechanism includes a lower reflector that covers the lower surface of the central light emitting substrate and the lower light source, the lower reflectors (the reflector HA412 in the top lens, the LED substrate hidden member HA16 in the top lens), and the central light emitting device. And a lower light guide lens ((right downlight lens HA415, left downlight lens) disposed to the side of the gap with the substrate and disposed to the lower light guide region.

  According to the above-described configuration, it is possible to achieve the production of light at a plurality of locations with a simple configuration including the reflector and the light guide lens.

(30-6) The upper light guide mechanism is arranged to emit light from the left end area of the door and each area on the center side from the right end area as the upper light guide area,
The lower light guide mechanism is arranged to emit light from upper regions of the upper speakers arranged on the upper left and upper right sides of the door, respectively, as lower light guide regions.

  According to the above configuration, an area in which light cannot be sufficiently emitted by the left end light emitting mechanism and the right end light emitting mechanism can be emitted by the upper light guiding mechanism and the lower light guiding mechanism.

(31-1) A gaming machine having an effect device (screen mechanism D) arranged at the center of the front of the housing (housing 2) and a light emitting unit (left panel mechanism HJ) arranged on the side of the effect device. And
The light emitting unit,
A light source device (left LED substrate HJ1) capable of irradiating light to the front side and the rear side of the housing;
A partition member (partition mechanism HJ2) that divides the light toward the front side into two, and guides the divided light toward one side of the housing;
A side light-transmitting member (upper left side lens HJ3) which constitutes a part of one side surface of the housing and transmits the one of the divided lights guided by the partition member;
A front light-transmitting member (lower left lens HJ) that constitutes a part of the front surface of the housing and transmits the light that is divided into the other by the partition member;
An inner light guide member (inner light guide member HJ5) that guides light toward the rear surface side in a direction in which the effect device is arranged;
Having.

  BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of performing an effect by operating a movable body (see Patent Document 1). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only with the image or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body. In recent years, it has been required to provide a plurality of such effect devices to further enhance the effect.

  Generally, a gaming machine is installed side by side on an installation island in a game arcade, so the size of the gaming machine is limited. However, when a plurality of effect devices or effect devices occupying a large space are provided, there is a possibility that sufficient space for a configuration including a reflector and a light transmitting plate for effecting light using a conventional LED may not be obtained. there were.

  According to the above configuration, the light emitted from the light source device toward the front side of the housing is divided into two, one of which is guided by the partition member toward one of the side surfaces of the housing and transmitted from the side light transmitting member, The other is transmitted from the front light transmitting member. Light emitted from the light source device toward the rear surface of the housing is guided by the light guide member to the effect device side. Thus, by merely providing the light emitting unit on the side surface, it is possible not only to achieve the effect light from the front and side surfaces of the gaming machine housing, but also to irradiate the effect device side with the light. As a result, the configuration of the effect light in the gaming machine can be reduced in space, and enlargement of the effect device can be allowed.

(31-2) The inner light guide member includes:
A light-transmitting member (left light guide plate HJ51), which is capable of transmitting light, is incident on the rear surface side of the light source device, and is disposed from the incident position to a peripheral edge of the front surface of the rendering device;
A reflecting member (left LED board cover HJ52) which is disposed in engagement with the rear side of the light transmitting member;
Has,
The translucent member,
A protruding portion (projection HJ511a) having a shape protruding into the light source device, arranged in a traveling direction of light toward the rear surface side of the light source device, and receiving light toward the rear surface side of the light source device; When,
The light-transmitting member is a wall surface that is engaged with the reflection member, is disposed in a traveling direction of the light that has entered the projection, and has a reflection surface that is inclined in a direction toward the rendering device and is incident on the projection. An inclined surface (inclined surface HJ511c) for reflecting the reflected light in the direction of the effect device;
An optical path section (optical path section HJ512) in which the light reflected by the inclined surface travels and has a shape bent in the traveling direction of the light;
A light-emitting unit (light-emitting unit HJ513) formed at an end of the light path in the light traveling direction and having a zigzag cross section when viewed from the front;
have.

  According to the above configuration, the light traveling toward the rear surface side of the light source device is incident on the protruding portion, and then the traveling direction is changed to the rendering device side by the reflecting portion. Since the reflection portion is disposed with the reflection member engaged, light is reflected into the inner light guide member. Then, the reflected light passes through an optical path portion having a bent shape, and then reaches a zigzag light emitting portion. As a result, the light-emitting portion is irregularly refracted. Thereby, the light traveling from the light source of the light emitting device is variously emitted to the outside, so that the performance can be enhanced.

(32-1) a corner translucent member (upper left panel mechanism HB) disposed at a corner position on the front side of the upper surface of the housing;
A support member (panel base HH) located behind the corner light transmitting member;
An outer wall member (top lens cover HA11) which is adjacent to the corner light transmitting member and in which the adjacent portion is engaged;
Has,
The corner translucent member,
A fitting portion (fitting portion HB11) into which a protruding portion (tight screw HH4) disposed to protrude from the support member in the front direction is fitted at the rear side position;
A notch formed in the outer wall member, which is disposed at the adjacent portion on the front side of the fitting portion and which projects in a direction different from the fitting direction of the fitting portion toward the outer wall member from the placement portion; (Locking pieces HB12, HB13, HB14) engaging with the notches HA111, HA112, HA113;
have.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with an effect device capable of performing various effects have been known. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685, through the movement of the movable body, a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only with the image or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device is intended. In such a gaming machine, it is known that a side or a part of a front surface of the gaming machine is formed of a translucent member, and the effect is further enhanced by irradiating this with a light source from the inside of the gaming machine. .

  However, when the fixing member is simply fixed with a fixing member such as a screw, the light transmitting member transmits light, and thus the fixing member is visually recognized from the outside, and there is a problem that the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine is significantly impaired. Further, when the translucent member is extended to a position where it is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside and fixed with a fixing member, there is a problem that installation of a plurality of effect devices and effect devices occupying a large space as in the related art is limited. there were.

  According to the above configuration, the translucent member is adjacent to the outer wall member while being engaged therewith, and the locking piece of the translucent member is engaged with the cutout portion of the outer wall member. The projection is provided in the front direction from the support member, so that the projection is fitted into the fitting portion of the light transmitting member. Since the protruding portion is fitted into the fitting portion of the light transmitting member, the movement of the light transmitting member in the vertical direction is restricted. Furthermore, since the fitting direction of the protrusion and the protrusion direction of the locking piece are arranged differently, the movement of the light transmitting member in the horizontal direction is restricted by the support member and the outer wall member. As a result, the translucent member can be easily attached to the gaming machine without using the fixing member and without impairing the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine.

(32-2)
A frame member (frame portion HB2) for supporting the corner portion light-transmitting member in a vertical direction;
The corner translucent member has a regulating portion (regulating portion HB21) that extends along the frame member to a rear position of the frame member at a vertically lower position and regulates movement of the corner member in a forward direction. are doing

  According to the above configuration, since the translucent member is supported by the frame member in the vertical direction, it is possible to reduce the stress in the vertical direction on the protrusion and the fitting portion into which the protrusion is fitted. Further, since the restricting portion of the translucent member is disposed at the rear position of the frame member, the forward movement of the translucent member itself is restricted, and horizontal stress on the locking pieces and the notches can be reduced. it can. Thereby, deterioration of the light transmitting member and the structure related to the light transmitting member can be reduced.

(33-1) a door capable of opening and closing the front side of the housing;
A decorative projection protruding forward from the upper part of the door,
The decorative convex portion is provided with a light guide plate (top lens light guide plate HA14) having a seamless structure that diffuses light and uniformly emits light from the surface of the decorative convex portion from the front end to the rear end of the decorative convex portion. The decoration unit HA1 is formed.

  DESCRIPTION OF RELATED ART Conventionally, as disclosed in Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-245279, the gaming machine with which the production | presentation apparatus was provided in the front door is known. According to such a gaming machine, various effects can be performed using the effect device, and the interest of the game can be improved. Since the front door faces the player, it is in a state where it is likely to receive external force due to contact with the player, so it is necessary to ensure durability.However, if importance is placed on the arrangement and design of the directing device, There was a problem that durability was reduced. In particular, when a protruding portion protruding from the front surface is provided, the possibility of contact increases, so that more durability has been required.

  According to the above configuration, when the light guide plate of the decorative unit is formed by joining a plurality of components, the load is concentrated on the joint portion of the light guide pieces between the components, but if the light guide plate has a seamless structure. For example, it is possible to avoid a situation where the load is concentrated on a part. As a result, since the decorative projection formed by the decorative unit having the light guide plate having the seamless structure has a large rigidity and strength as a whole, an external force is applied by contact with a player located in front of the gaming machine. In this case, the door is hardly deformed or damaged, and as a result, the durability of the door can be increased.

(33-2) The decoration unit is:
A hollow portion is formed by the top lens light guide plate base HA15 connected to the door frame and the top lens cover HA11 that transmits the light to the outside, and the light guide plate is housed in the hollow portion.
The front side area is curved downward, and the width in the left-right direction is reduced from the door side to the front end side, and is formed in a shape having a vertex at the front end center portion,
The back surface of the front area and the frame of the door are connected by a decorative unit support mechanism that is horizontally arranged.

  According to the above configuration, by storing the light guide plate in the hollow portion formed by the top lens light guide plate base and the top lens cover, the top lens light guide plate base, the top lens cover, and the light guide plate are simply laminated. It is possible to form a decorative convex portion having higher rigidity than a plate-like shape. In addition, the bending moment increases as it approaches the front end that moves away from the rear end connected to the door frame.However, by reducing the front-end width in the left-right direction to reduce the weight, the rigidity of the front-side area and It is possible to increase the strength. In addition, the back surface of the front area of the decoration unit curved downward is connected to the frame of the door via the horizontally arranged decoration unit support mechanism, so that the back surface of the front area of the decoration unit is formed by the decoration unit support mechanism. It is supported in the horizontal direction, and the front region has large rigidity and strength in the front-rear direction. Thereby, even when an external force is applied to the decorative convex portion formed by the decorative unit from a player or the like, the decorative convex portion is hardly deformed or damaged, and as a result, the durability of the door can be increased. It has become.

(33-3) a door capable of opening and closing the front side of the housing;
A decorative projection protruding forward from the upper part of the door,
The decorative convex portion,
A top lens light guide plate base connected to the frame of the door, a top lens light guide plate HA14 that diffuses light and uniformly emits light from the surface, and a top lens cover that transmits the light to the outside,
There is a decorative unit whose width in the left-right direction is reduced from the door side to the front end side, and which is formed in a shape having a vertex at the center of the front end.

  According to the above configuration, the bending moment increases as approaching the front end which is away from the rear end connected to the door frame, but the weight is reduced by decreasing the width in the left-right direction on the front end side, thereby increasing rigidity. And the strength can be increased. As a result, since the decorative convex portion has a large rigidity and strength in the front side region, even when an external force is applied due to contact with a player located in front of the gaming machine, the decorative convex portion is unlikely to be deformed or damaged. As a result, it is possible to increase the durability of the door.

(33-4) The decoration unit is:
A hollow portion is formed by the top lens light guide plate base and the top lens cover, and the top lens light guide plate is accommodated in the hollow portion.

  According to the above configuration, the top lens light guide plate is housed in the hollow portion formed by the top lens light guide plate base and the top lens cover, thereby simplifying the top lens light guide plate base, the top lens cover, and the top lens light guide plate. Since the second moment of area is larger than in the case of laminating into a plate shape, it is possible to form a highly rigid decorative projection.

(33-5) In the decoration unit, a front region is curved downward,
The back surface of the front side region of the decorative unit and the frame of the door are connected by a horizontally arranged decorative unit support mechanism.

  According to the above configuration, the back surface of the front region of the decoration unit curved downward is connected to the door frame via the horizontally arranged decoration unit support mechanism, so that the back surface of the front region of the decoration unit is decorated. The unit is supported horizontally by the unit support mechanism. Thereby, since the decoration convex portion having the decoration unit and the decoration unit support mechanism has a large rigidity and strength in the front-back direction in the front-rear direction, an external force is applied by contact with a player located in front of the gaming machine. In this case, the door is hardly deformed or damaged, and as a result, the durability of the door can be increased.

(33-6) An irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light in the direction of a screen device C arranged diagonally below and rearward is disposed behind the decorative convex portion.

  According to the above configuration, since a large space can be secured behind the decorative convex portion, the degree of freedom of the size and arrangement of the irradiation light device can be increased, and the rigidity and strength of the decorative convex portion are high. In addition, the irradiation light device can be sufficiently protected.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the first and second embodiments described above, the projector mechanism B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are at predetermined positions in the display unit A. Fixed. On the other hand, a screw for adjusting the light reflection direction is provided in the mirror mechanism B3, and the screw is exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet 21. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet 21 of the gaming machine 1, by loosening or tightening the screws with the upper door mechanism UD opened, the light reflection direction (angle) can be changed. Can be adjusted. Thereby, even if the position of the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is not appropriate, the projection position can be adjusted.

  In the first and second embodiments described above, the projector mechanism B2, the mirror mechanism B3, and the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have been described as being unitized. However, the projector mechanism, the mirror mechanism, and the various screens may be directly attached to the main body of the gaming machine without being unitized.

(Third embodiment)
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The gaming machine according to the third embodiment differs from the first and second embodiments in the configuration of the display unit. Hereinafter, the same portions as those in the first and second embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

(Display unit 3A)
As shown in FIG. 145, the display unit 3A according to the third embodiment emits irradiation light including an image and emits the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, so that the image appears. This is a so-called projection mapping device having a screen device 3C.

  The projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object. For example, the position (projection distance or angle, etc.) of By projecting an image according to the effect information generated based on the shape, an advanced and powerful effect can be achieved.

  The display unit 3A has a housing 3A1 having an opening formed in the front. The housing 3A1 includes a projector cover B1 of the irradiation light device B and a screen housing 3C10 of the screen device 3C. The screen housing 3C10 has a box shape having a bottom plate 3C1, a right plate 3C2, a left plate 3C3, and a back plate 3C4. Then, the projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the upper surface of the screen housing 3C10.

  The bottom plate 3C1 of the screen housing 3C10 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape when viewed from above. A screen mechanism N is mounted and fixed at the center of the upper surface of the bottom plate 3C1.

  As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the screen mechanism N includes a first base member N1, a second base member N2, a pair of side plate members N3, a movable base member N4, a driving device N5, a first three-dimensional member R1, and A second three-dimensional member R2 (see FIG. 146) is provided.

  Each of the first base member N1 and the second base member N2 is a flat member having a flat surface. The first substrate N1 is placed on the bottom plate 3C1 such that the flat surface N1a is parallel to the horizontal plane. On the other hand, the second substrate N2 is erected on the bottom plate 3C1 such that the flat surface N2a is orthogonal to the horizontal plane and parallel to the left-right direction. The lower end of the second member N2 is connected to the rear end of the first base member N1.

  The pair of side plate members N3 are fan-shaped flat plate members erected from the bottom plate 3C1 so as to sandwich the first base member N1 and the second base member N2 in the left-right direction. The flat surfaces of the pair of side plate members N3 face each other in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, a bearing portion N3a is formed on each of the pair of side plate members N3. As shown in FIG. 146, the first bearing portion N3a is located above the flat surface N1a of the first base member N1 and in front of the flat surface N2a of the second base member N2 in a side view. It is arranged near the connection point between the base material N1 and the second base material N2. An arc-shaped guide groove N3b is formed in each of the pair of side plate members N3. The arc center of the guide groove N3b coincides with the bearing portion N3a.

  The movable substrate N4 is a flat plate-like member, and has a rotation shaft N4a protruding outward in the left-right direction on both sides on the base end side. The rotation shaft N4a is rotatably supported by a bearing portion N3a of the side plate member N3. Guide rods N4b projecting outward in the left-right direction are formed on both side surfaces on the free end side of the movable base material N4. The guide rod N4b is slidably engaged with the guide groove N3b of the side plate member N3. With the above configuration, the movable substrate N4 can rotate in a range of about 90 degrees around the rotation axis N4a while the guide rod N4b slides in the guide groove N3b.

  As shown in FIG. 146, the first base member N1, the movable base member N4, and the second base member N2 are arranged along the rotation direction. The movable base N4 is disposed between the first base N1 and the second base N2, and is adjacent to each of the first base N1 and the second base N2. When the movable base N4 rotates around the rotation axis N4a, the relative position of the movable base N4 with respect to each of the first base N1 and the second base N2 is displaced. That is, when the movable base N4 rotates around the rotation axis N4a, the movable base N4 relatively moves with respect to each of the first base N1 and the second base N2.

  As shown in FIG. 147, the driving device N5 is fixed to the outer surface of the side plate member N3 arranged on the right side of the pair of side plate members N3. The driving device N5 is a device that drives the movable base N4 between the first rotation position and the second rotation position, and includes a gear N51, a motor shaft gear N52, and a drive motor N53. The gear N51 is fixed to a distal end of a rotating shaft N4a arranged on the right side of the two rotating shafts N4a of the movable base N4. A motor shaft gear N52 meshes with the gear N51. The drive shaft of the drive motor F24 is connected to the motor shaft gear F23. The drive motor F24 is a stepping motor, and is electrically connected to the sub-control device SS (see FIGS. 89 and 90, etc.) via the relay board CK (see FIG. 146), and controls the sub-control device SS. Driven by Although not shown, a decorative member is provided in front of the driving device N5 so that the driving device N5 cannot be visually recognized by a player.

  In the above configuration, when the drive motor N53 is driven under the control of the sub control device SS, the motor shaft gear N52 rotates. With the rotation of the motor shaft gear N52, the gear N51 rotates. In conjunction with the rotation of the gear N51, the movable base N4 rotates about the rotation axis N4a, and the first rotation position substantially parallel to the horizontal plane and the first rotation position substantially orthogonal to the horizontal plane. It will operate between the two pivot positions. Here, the first rotation position is, as shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, a pair of bases including the movable base N4 and the first base N1 approaching each other, and the movable base N4 and the second base N1. This is the position where the base material pair composed of the material N2 is separated from each other. Further, as shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, the pair of bases including the movable base N4 and the first base N1 is separated from each other, and the movable base N4 and the second base This is a position where the base material pair composed of N2 is close to each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 145 and 147, both the first three-dimensional member R1 and the second three-dimensional member R2 are members obtained by cutting a thin resin sheet material into a predetermined shape, and the surface thereof has a white screen. Paint is applied. Further, each of the first three-dimensional member R1 and the second three-dimensional member R2 is provided with a plurality of bent portions R5 in advance, and can be folded by bending at the bent portions R5. Specifically, each of the first three-dimensional member R1 and the second three-dimensional member R2 is provided in advance with a mountain fold line R5a having a convex shape at the bent portion R5 and a valley fold line R5b having a concave shape at the bent portion R5. ing. In the present embodiment, both the mountain fold line R5a and the valley fold line R5b extend in the left-right direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the movable base N4, and the central optical axis of the irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 in plan view. And the mountain fold line R5a and the valley fold line R5b.

  As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the first three-dimensional member R1 is provided between the second base member N2 and the movable base member N4. One end of the first three-dimensional member R1 is fixed to the flat surface N2a of the second base N2, and the other end is fixed to one end N4c of the movable base N4.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, the second three-dimensional member R2 is provided between the first base member N1 and the movable base member N4. One end of the second three-dimensional member R2 is fixed to the flat surface N1a of the first base N1, and the other end is fixed to the other end N4d of the movable base N4.

  The first three-dimensional member R1 and the second three-dimensional member R2 are expanded and contracted in conjunction with the operation of the movable base N4. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, when the movable base N4 is disposed at the first rotation position, the first three-dimensional member R1 moves three-dimensionally with respect to the second base N1 and the movable base N4. The second three-dimensional member is folded at the bent portion R5, and is folded and accommodated between the first base member N1 and the movable base member N4. In a state where the movable base N4 is disposed at the first rotation position, only the first three-dimensional member R1 appears. That is, the player can visually recognize only the first three-dimensional member R1 via the upper display window UD1, and the irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 can be emitted only to the first three-dimensional member R1.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, when the movable base N4 is disposed at the second rotation position, the first three-dimensional member R1 is bent at the bent portion R5 and the second base N1 and the movable base N1 are moved. The storage state is such that the second three-dimensional member R2 is folded and stored between the base materials N4, and the second three-dimensional member R2 is developed three-dimensionally with respect to the first base material N1 and the movable base material N4. In a state where the movable base N4 is arranged at the second rotation position, only the second three-dimensional member R2 appears. That is, the player can visually recognize only the second three-dimensional member R2 through the upper display window UD1, and the irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 can be emitted only to the second three-dimensional member R2.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub controller SS controls the drive motor N53 to rotate the movable base N4, thereby controlling the movement of the first three-dimensional member R1 and the second three-dimensional member R2. It becomes possible. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 145 to 148, the position and the number of the bent portions R5 are different between the first three-dimensional member R1 and the second three-dimensional member. As a result, the first three-dimensional member R1 and the second three-dimensional member have different shapes when they are deployed, so that various effects can be performed. Note that the first three-dimensional member R1 and the second three-dimensional member R2 in the unfolded state represent a character, a building, and the like three-dimensionally.

(Control of display unit by sub-control device SS)
Next, an example of a control process of the display unit 3A executed by the sub control device SS will be described. The sub-control device SS controls the projector mechanism B2 and the screen device 3C according to the game state according to the control program stored in the memory. Specifically, the sub-control device SS controls the drive motor N53 to rotate the movable base N4, thereby switching the appearing three-dimensional member between the first three-dimensional member R1 and the second three-dimensional member. The switching of the appearing three-dimensional members R1 and R2 is performed, for example, when the game state is switched between the normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

  The sub-control device SS controls the projector mechanism B2 to control whether or not irradiation light is emitted from the projector mechanism B2. Thus, the three-dimensional members R1 and R2 can be switched between a state where the irradiation light is irradiated from the projector mechanism B2 and a state where the irradiation light is not irradiated, so that various effects can be executed. .

  Further, it controls the projector mechanism B2 to control an image emitted from the projector mechanism B2. For example, the image content to be irradiated on the three-dimensional members R1 and R2 is changed according to the game state. Further, the sub-control device SS may control the projector mechanism B2 to deform and correct the image according to the three-dimensional shape of the three-dimensional members R1 and R2 to be projected according to the game state. An image may be projected on the three-dimensional members R1 and R2 without doing so. Further, the image projected onto the three-dimensional members R1 and R2 may be deformed and corrected so that the player sees the image as a two-dimensional image. In these cases, even with the same video content, it is possible to change the distortion and the like of the video projected on the three-dimensional members R1 and R2, so that various effects can be executed.

  Further, when controlling the drive motor N53 to rotate the movable base N4 between the first rotation position and the second rotation position, the sub-control device SS causes the projector mechanism B2 to emit flash light. One of the processing and the processing of darkening the image projected from the projector mechanism B2 is performed. By performing these processes, it is possible to notify the player that the effect is to be changed. In addition, since the movement of the movable base material N4 can be made difficult for the player to see, the effect can be smoothly changed.

  As described above, by rotating the movable base material N4 between the first rotation position and the second rotation position, the three-dimensional members R1 and R2 can be made to protrude and disappear. It is possible to perform powerful effects that are difficult to obtain. In addition, by projecting the image of the projector mechanism B2 onto the unfolded three-dimensional members R1 and R2, it is possible to perform a three-dimensional and powerful image effect.

  In the above-described embodiment, the screen mechanism N is fixed to the bottom plate 3C1, but the present invention is not particularly limited to this. The screen mechanism N is fixed to the right plate 3C2, the left plate 3C3, the back plate 3C4, and the projector cover B1. Is also good. The number of the screen mechanisms N is not limited to one, but may be plural. Further, a screen paint is applied to the flat surface N1a of the first base material N1, the flat surface N2a of the second base material N2, and the one end surface N4c and the other end surface N4d of the movable base material N4. It may be configured to function as a screen on which an image from the projector mechanism B2 is projected. In addition to the screen mechanism N, a screen on which an image from the projector mechanism B2 is projected may be fixedly arranged on the front surface of the back plate 3C4, for example.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, only one movable base is disposed between the first base N1 and the second base N2, but a plurality of movable bases are provided between these bases. It may be arranged. In this case, a three-dimensional member is provided between each pair of two base materials corresponding to each pair of two base materials adjacent to each other in the rotating direction of the movable base material, and each movable base material is provided by a driving device. By independently rotating, it is possible to control the emergence of each three-dimensional member. Also, only one of the first base material N1 and the second base material N2 is provided, and only the expansion / contraction of one three-dimensional member provided between the base material and the movable base material is reduced. It may be configured to be executable.

  Next, a modified example of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, the screen device 2N according to the present modification includes a first movable base 2N1, a second movable base 2N2, a first three-dimensional member R11, a second three-dimensional member R12, and a driving device. 2N5 (see FIG. 151).

  Both the first movable base 2N1 and the second movable base 2N2 are flat members, and the flat surfaces are orthogonal to the horizontal plane and orthogonal to the left-right direction. Further, the first movable base 2N1 and the second movable base 2N2 face each other.

  As shown in FIG. 150, rollers 2N3 are provided at both ends in the front-rear direction of the lower surface of each of the first movable base material 2N1 and the second movable base material 2N2. The roller 2N3 is placed on a pair of concave guide grooves 3C1a formed on the upper surface of the bottom plate 3C1. The pair of guide grooves 3C1a extend in the left-right direction. With the above configuration, each of the first movable base material 2N1 and the second movable base material 2N2 can move in the left-right direction as the roller 2N3 rolls along the guide groove 3C1a.

  As shown in FIG. 151, a drive pin 2N4 extending downward is provided on the lower surface of each of the first movable base 2N1 and the second movable base 2N2. The driving pin 2N4 provided on the first movable base 2N1 is slidably engaged with a slit 3C1c formed on the bottom plate 3C1 and extending in the left-right direction. The drive pin 2N4 provided on the second movable base 2N2 is slidably engaged with a slit 3C1d formed on the bottom plate 3C1 and extending in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 150, an accommodation recess 3C3a capable of accommodating the first movable base 2N1 and the second movable base 2N2 is formed on the inner surface of the left side plate 3C3 of the screen housing 3C10. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 152, when the first movable base material 2N1 and the second movable base material 2N2 are moved leftward to be accommodated in the accommodation recess 3C3a, the player can move the first movable base material 2N1 and the second movable base material 2N1. The second movable base material 2N2 is configured to be invisible.

  As shown in FIG. 151, the driving device 2N5 is housed in a recess 3C1b formed on the lower surface of the bottom plate 3C1. The driving device 2N5 is a driving device that can independently drive the first movable base 2N1 and the second movable base 2N2 in the left-right direction, and includes a first driving mechanism 2N6 and a second driving mechanism 2N7. . The first drive mechanism 2N6 is a mechanism for driving the first movable base 2N1 in the left-right direction, and includes first to fourth pulleys 2N11 to 2N14, first and second transmission belts 2N15 and 2N16, and a drive motor 2N17. ing.

  The first and second pulleys 2N11 and 2N12 are arranged apart from each other in the left-right direction, and the axial direction of the rotation axis coincides with the up-down direction. The first transmission belt 2N15 is wound around the first and second pulleys 2N11 and 2N12. Further, the drive pin 2N4 of the first movable base material 2N1 is connected to the first transmission belt 2N15. The third pulley 2N13 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the first pulley 2N11, and the fourth pulley 2N14 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 2N17. The second transmission belt 2N16 is wound around the third and fourth pulleys 2N13 and 2N14. The drive motor 2N17 is a stepping motor, is electrically connected to the sub-control device SS (see FIGS. 89 and 90, etc.) via the relay board CK, and is driven by the control of the sub-control device SS.

  In the above configuration, when the drive motor 2N17 is driven under the control of the sub control device SS, the fourth pulley 2N14 is rotated, and the third pulley 2N13 is rotated via the second transmission belt 2N16. In conjunction with the rotation of the third pulley 2N13, the first pulley 2N11 rotates and the first transmission belt 2N15 runs. As a result, the first movable substrate 2N1 moves in the left-right direction.

  The second drive mechanism 2N7 is a mechanism for driving the second movable base 2N2 in the left-right direction, and has a configuration substantially similar to that of the first drive mechanism 2N6. The first transmission belt 2N15 in the second drive mechanism 2N7 is connected to a drive pin 2N4 provided on the second movable base 2N2.

  As described above, by driving the drive motors 2N17 of the first drive mechanism 2N6 and the second drive mechanism 2N7, respectively, under the control of the sub control device SS, the first movable base 2N1 and the second movable base 2N2 , And the relative position between the second movable base material 2N2 and the left side surface 3C3b of the housing recess 3C3a can be independently displaced.

  As shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, the first three-dimensional member R11 is provided between the first movable base 2N1 and the second movable base 2N2. One end of the first three-dimensional member R11 is fixed to the left flat surface 2N1a of the first movable base 2N1, and the other end is fixed to the right flat surface 2N2a of the second movable base 2N2. ing.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 149, the second three-dimensional member R12 is provided between the second movable base 2N2 and the left side plate 3C3. The second three-dimensional member R12 has one end fixed to the left flat surface 2N2b of the second movable base 2N2, and the other end fixed to the left surface 3C3b of the accommodation recess 3C3a.

  The first three-dimensional member R11 is expanded and contracted in conjunction with the operation of the first movable base 2N1 and the second movable base 2N2. Specifically, when the first movable base material 2N1 and the second movable base material 2N2 come to a relative position close to each other, the first three-dimensional member R11 is bent at the bent part R5, and the first movable base material 2N1 and the second movable base material 2N1 are bent. It is in a housed state where it is folded and housed between the movable base material 2N2. On the other hand, when the first movable base material 2N1 and the second movable base material 2N2 are at relative positions separated from each other, the first three-dimensional member R11 is three-dimensionally moved with respect to the first movable base material 2N1 and the second movable base material 2N2. It will be in the expanded state to be expanded.

  The second three-dimensional member R12 is expanded and contracted in conjunction with the operation of the second movable base material 2N2. More specifically, when the second movable base 2N2 comes to a position close to the housing recess 3C3a, the second three-dimensional member R12 is bent at the bent portion R5, and the left side surface of the second movable base 2N2 and the housing recess 3C3a. 3C3b. On the other hand, when the second movable base material 2N2 is at a position separated from the left side surface 3C3b, the second three-dimensional member R12 is in a developed state in which the second three-dimensional member R12 is three-dimensionally developed with respect to the second movable base material 2N2 and the left side surface 3C3b.

  As described above, in the present modification, the sub control device SS controls the drive motors 2N17 of the first drive mechanism 2N6 and the second drive mechanism 2N7, respectively, to move the first movable base 2N1 and the second movable base 2N2 right and left. By moving the first three-dimensional member R11 and the second three-dimensional member R12, the movement in the directions can be controlled. In this modification, the relative position between the first movable base 2N1 and the second movable base 2N2 and the relative position between the second movable base 2N2 and the left side surface 3C3b may be independently displaced. It is possible. As a result, a state in which neither the first three-dimensional member R11 nor the second three-dimensional member R12 appears (see FIG. 152), a state in which only the first three-dimensional member R11 appears (see FIG. 150), and a second three-dimensional member Since it is possible to adopt a state where only R12 appears, and a state where both the first three-dimensional member R11 and the second three-dimensional member R12 appear (see FIG. 149), various effects are performed. Becomes possible.

  In this modification, a screen 2N10 is fixed to the front surface of the back plate 3C4 by screwing or the like. The screen 2N10 is disposed so that the projection surface faces the player on the front side.

  The sub-control device SS controls the projector mechanism B2 to control whether or not irradiation light is emitted from the projector mechanism B2. In addition, when the sub-control device SS emits irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2, the sub-controller SS controls the projector mechanism B2 so that the three-dimensional projection target of the screen 2N10, the first three-dimensional member R11, and the second three-dimensional member R12. Therefore, a projection target for projecting an image is appropriately selected from three ranges from 0 (a state in which the image is not irradiated), and the selected projection target is irradiated with the image. For example, when the first three-dimensional member R11 and the second three-dimensional member R12 appear, the image from the projector mechanism B2 is irradiated only on the screen 2N10 and the second three-dimensional member R12, and the first three-dimensional member R11 May not be irradiated with an image. In the present embodiment, the irradiation range of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 is constant regardless of the number of projection targets. That is, when the irradiation light is emitted from the projector mechanism B2, the irradiation light is also applied to the projection target that does not project the image. At this time, a projection target that does not project an image is irradiated with black or the same color as the projection target from the projector mechanism B2 to show the player that the image is not displayed on the projection target. I have.

  Further, under the control of the sub-control device SS, the first movable base 2N1 may be positioned and arranged at three or more relative positions with respect to the second movable base 2N2. In this case, by changing the relative position, the first three-dimensional member R11 can appear in a plurality of modes having different degrees of deployment. Similarly, the second movable base material 2N2 may be positioned and arranged at three or more relative positions to the left side surface 3C3b. In this case, the second three-dimensional member R12 can appear in a plurality of modes having different degrees of development.

  As another modified example, as shown in FIG. 153, a housing recess 3C2a is also formed on the inner surface of the right side plate 3C2 of the screen housing 3C10. The first three-dimensional member R11 is provided between the right side surface 3C2b of the housing recess 3C2a and the first movable base 2N1, and the relative position of the first movable base 2N1 with respect to the right side 3C2b is displaced. The first three-dimensional member may be configured to expand and contract. In this case, it is possible to perform an effect in which the second three-dimensional member R12 protrudes and retreats from the left side plate 3C3, and the first three-dimensional member R11 protrudes and retreats from the right side plate 3C2.

(Summary)
(34-1) As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
A gaming machine having a display unit (display unit 3A) for displaying a video,
The display unit includes:
A projector (projector mechanism B2) for projecting an image,
A screen device (screen device 3C) to be projected by the projector; a control unit (sub-control device SS) for controlling the projector and the screen device;
With
The screen device,
N (N is an integer of 2 or more) base materials (first base material N1, second base material N1, and movable base material N4);
N-1 three-dimensionally expandable three-dimensional members provided between each pair of two base materials corresponding to each pair of two adjacent base materials in the N base materials. (A first three-dimensional member R1 and a second three-dimensional member R2);
A driving mechanism (driving device N5) for relatively moving the two base materials of each pair between a first position close to each other and a second position separated from each other in the N base materials. Prepared,
Each of the N-1 three-dimensional members is
When the two base materials to be paired are arranged at the first position, the two base materials are housed in a folded state between the two base materials,
When the two base materials to be paired are arranged at the second position, the two base materials stand upright and are three-dimensionally expanded, and can be irradiated with irradiation light from the projector. Becomes
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine that projects an effect image of a game using a projector on a screen has been proposed. For example, JP-A-6-35066 describes a gaming machine that projects projection light from a projector onto a flat screen arranged in the gaming machine.

  However, the effect contents that can be executed in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 6-35066 are limited to two-dimensional image effects, and thus have a lack of power.

  According to the present embodiment, the three-dimensional member is moved relatively between the first position (the first rotation position) and the second position (the second rotation position) of the pair of base materials. Because it can appear and disappear, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that is difficult to obtain with video alone. In addition, by projecting the image of the projector onto the three-dimensional member in the unfolded state, it is possible to perform a three-dimensional and powerful image effect.

(34-2) The gaming machine according to (34-1),
The control means (sub-control device SS)
When the drive mechanism (drive device N5) is controlled to relatively move the pair of base materials between the first position and the second position,
One of a process of emitting flash light from the projector (projector mechanism B2) and a process of darkening an image emitted from the projector are executed.

  According to the present invention, by performing the process of irradiating the flash light from the projector and the process of darkening the image radiated from the projector, it is possible to notify the player that the effect is to be changed. Further, by making it difficult for a player to see the movement of the screen device when the base material to be paired relatively moves between the first position and the second position, the effect can be smoothly changed.

(34-3) The gaming machine according to (34-1) or (34-2),
N is an integer of 3 or more;
The N-1 three-dimensional members (the first three-dimensional member R1 and the second three-dimensional member R2) have different shapes in the unfolded state.
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the invention of (34-3), since the shapes of the three-dimensional members in the unfolded state are different from each other, it is possible to perform various effects.

(Fourth embodiment)
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment differs from the first and second embodiments in the configuration of the display unit. Hereinafter, the same portions as those in the first and second embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

(Display unit 4A)
As shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, the display unit 4A according to the fourth embodiment includes an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image, and an irradiation light from the irradiation light device B that emits an image. Is a so-called projection mapping device having a screen device 4 </ b> C that makes the image appear.

  The projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object. For example, the position (projection distance or angle, etc.) of By projecting an image according to the effect information generated based on the shape, an advanced and powerful effect can be achieved.

  As shown in FIG. 154, the display unit 4A has a housing 4A1 having an opening formed in the front. The housing 4A1 includes a projector cover B1 of the irradiation light device B and a screen housing 4C10 of the screen device 4C. Then, the projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the upper surface of the screen housing 4C10.

  The screen device 4C includes a screen housing 4C10, a screen mechanism R, and a screen 4CS. The screen housing 4C10 has a box shape having a bottom plate 4C1, a right plate 4C2, a left plate 4C3, and a back plate 4C4.

  The screen 4CS is fixed to the front surface of the back plate 4C4 of the screen housing 4C10 by screwing or the like. The screen 4CS is arranged so that the projection surface faces the player on the front side.

  The bottom plate 4C1 of the screen housing 4C10 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape when viewed from above. An opening 4C1a is formed in the center of the bottom plate 4C1 so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 156, an accommodation recess 4C1b that is recessed upward from the lower surface of the bottom plate 4C1 is formed to the left of the opening 4C1a in the bottom plate 4C1.

  As shown in FIGS. 154 to 156, the screen mechanism R includes a screen member Q to be projected by the projector mechanism B2, and a drive mechanism T (see FIG. 156) that moves the screen member Q. The screen member Q includes a first screen body Q1 and a second screen body Q2.

  As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the first screen body Q1 is a flat screen plate Q11, a left side wall Q12 extending downward from the left end of the screen plate Q11, and a downward direction from the right end of the screen plate Q11. It has a substantially U-shaped configuration including the extended right side wall Q13. The surface of the screen plate Q11 is the screen surface Q1a to which the screen paint is applied. The area of the screen surface Q1a is slightly smaller than the opening area of the opening 4C1a of the bottom plate 4C1.

  The base end (front end) of the first screen body Q1 is supported on the left inner wall and the right inner wall of the opening 4C1a. More specifically, a turning shaft Q5a projects leftward from the outer surface of the left end wall Q12 on the base end side, and the turning shaft Q5a is rotatably supported by the left side wall of the opening 4C1a. The tip of the rotating shaft Q5a is arranged in the accommodation recess 4C1b. Similarly, a rotation axis Q5b projects rightward from the outer surface of the right side wall Q13, and the rotation axis Q5b is rotatably supported by the right side wall of the opening 4C1a. Note that the rotation axis Q5a and the rotation axis Q5b are arranged coaxially.

  Guide plates Q12a and Q13a protrude inward from the inner surfaces of the left side wall Q12 and the right side wall Q13, respectively. The guide plates Q12a and Q13a extend from the base end side toward the free end side (rearward side) and guide the movement of the second screen body Q2 with the screen plate Q11 (see FIG. 157). ) Is formed.

  The second screen body Q2 has a flat screen plate Q21. The surface of the screen plate Q21 is the screen surface Q2a to which the screen paint is applied.

  The horizontal width of the screen plate Q21 is slightly shorter than the horizontal width of the screen plate Q11 of the first screen body Q1. The left and right ends of the screen plate Q21 are slidably engaged with each other while being sandwiched between the screen plate Q11 and the guide plates Q12a and 13a. Thereby, the screen surface Q1a of the first screen body Q1 and the screen surface Q2a of the second screen body Q2 become parallel. Further, by sliding the screen plate Q21 to the free end side along the guide path Q15, the screen surface Q2a can be extended continuously with the screen surface Q1a of the first screen body Q1. That is, the screen surface of the screen member Q can be extended.

  As shown in FIG. 156, the drive mechanism T includes a first drive mechanism T1 that performs a rotation operation of rotating the screen member Q about the rotation axes Q5a and Q5b, and a second screen body Q2 that is a first screen body Q1. And a second drive mechanism T2 for making the screen surface of the screen member Q expand and contract by relatively moving the screen member Q.

  The first drive mechanism T1 is housed in the housing recess 4C1b, and includes a drive gear T11, a motor shaft gear T12, and a drive motor T13. The drive gear T11 is fixed to the tip of the rotation axis Q5a of the screen member Q. A motor shaft gear T12 meshes with the drive gear T11. The drive shaft of the drive motor T13 is connected to the motor shaft gear T12. The drive motor T13 is a stepping motor, is electrically connected to the sub-control device SS (see FIGS. 89 and 90, etc.) via the relay board CK, and is driven by the control of the sub-control device SS.

  In the above configuration, when the drive motor T13 is driven under the control of the sub control device SS, the motor shaft gear T12 rotates. With the rotation of the motor shaft gear T12, the drive gear T11 rotates. In conjunction with the rotation of the drive gear T11, the screen member Q (the first screen body Q1) rotates about the rotation axes Q5a and Q5b, and moves between the first displacement position and the second displacement position. Between them.

  Here, the first displacement position is a position where the screen surfaces Q1a and Q2a of the screen member Q are parallel to the horizontal plane. In this first displacement position, as shown in FIG. 157, the screen surface Q1a of the screen member Q is flush with the upper surface of the bottom plate 4C1.

  On the other hand, the second displacement position is a position where the screen surfaces Q1a and Q2a of the screen member Q intersect with the horizontal plane as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the second displacement position is a position where the free end of the screen member Q is rearward of the base end and the inclination angles of the screen surfaces Q1a and Q2a with respect to the horizontal plane are larger than 0 degrees and smaller than 90 degrees. It is. At the second displacement position, the area of the screen surface of the screen member Q when viewed from the upper display window UD1 (front) is larger than the first displacement position.

  As shown in FIG. 156, the second drive mechanism T2 is attached to the screen member Q, and includes a rack gear T21, a pinion gear T22, a first pulley T23, a second pulley T24, a transmission belt T25, and a drive motor T26. I have.

  The rack gear T21 is attached to the lower surface of the screen plate Q21 of the second screen body Q2, and extends from the base end to the free end of the screen plate Q21. The pinion gear T22 meshes with the rack gear T21, and is fixed to a rotation shaft Q61 rotatably supported by the left side wall Q12 and the right side wall Q13 of the first screen body Q1. The first pulley T23 is fixed to a rotation shaft Q61, and the second pulley T24 is fixed to a drive shaft of a drive motor T26. The drive shaft of the drive motor T26 is rotatably supported by a pair of bearings Q62 vertically provided from the screen plate Q11. The bearing Q62 is disposed so as to sandwich the second pulley T24 in the left-right direction.

  The transmission belt T25 is wound around the first pulley T23 and the second pulley T24. The drive motor T26 is fixed to the lower surface of the screen plate Q21 of the first screen body Q1. The drive motor T26 is a stepping motor, is electrically connected to the sub-control device SS (see FIGS. 89 and 90, etc.) via the relay board CK, and is driven by the control of the sub-control device SS. .

  In the above configuration, when the drive motor T26 is driven under the control of the sub control device SS, the second pulley T24 rotates. With the rotation of the second pulley T24, the transmission belt T25 runs, and the first pulley T23 rotates. When the pinion gear T22 rotates by the rotation of the first pulley T23, the rack gear T21 moves along the screen surface Q1a of the screen member Q. Then, with the movement of the rack gear T21, the screen surface Q2a of the second screen body Q2 relatively moves (slides) with respect to the screen surface Q1a of the first screen body Q1. Therefore, the screen surface of the screen member Q can be extended or contracted.

  As shown in FIG. 157, in the present embodiment, the drive motor T26 is driven under the control of the sub control device SS, so that the second screen body Q2 moves between the first slide position and the second slide position. Slide to move. The first sliding position is a position where the rear end of the second screen body Q2 is located forward of the rear end of the first screen body Q1 when the screen member Q is disposed at the first displacement position. This is the position where the screen surface of FIG. More specifically, when viewed from a direction orthogonal to the screen surface of the screen member Q, the first slide position is within the range of the screen surface Q1a of the first screen body Q1 and the screen surface Q2a of the second screen body Q2. Is the position where is placed. At the first sliding position, even if the screen member Q is arranged at the second displacement position, the screen surface Q2a of the second screen body Q2 cannot be visually recognized from the upper display window UD1, and the first screen body Q1 Only the screen surface Q1a can be visually recognized.

  In the present embodiment, when the screen member Q is arranged at the first displacement position, the second screen body Q2 is arranged at the first slide position. As a result, since the screen surface of the screen member Q is accommodated in the accommodation recess 4C1b in a contracted state, the size of the accommodation recess 4C1b can be reduced.

  The second slide position is a position where the rear end of the second screen body Q2 is behind the rear end of the first screen body Q1, and is a position where the screen surface of the screen member Q is extended. In the second slide position, when the screen member Q is disposed at the second displacement position, the upper display window UD1 projects not only on the screen surface Q1a of the first screen body Q1 but also on the screen surface Q2a of the second screen body Q2. The displayed video can also be viewed. That is, at the second slide position, the area of the screen surface of the screen member Q when viewed from the upper display window UD1 is larger than at the first slide position.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the sub-control device SS controls the drive motor T26 to move the second screen body Q2 from the first slide position to the second slide position, the sub-control device SS changes the screen surface of the screen member Q. When the second screen body Q2 is moved from the second slide position to the first slide position, the screen surface of the screen member Q can be contracted.

(Control of display unit by sub-control device SS)
Next, an example of a control process of the display unit 4A executed by the sub control device SS will be described. The sub-control device SS controls the projector mechanism B2 and the screen device 4C according to the game state according to the control program stored in the memory. In detail, the sub control device SS controls the drive motor T13 to rotate the screen member Q between the first displacement position and the second displacement position, and controls the drive motor T26 to control the second screen. The body Q2 is moved between the first slide position and the second slide position to expand and contract the screen surface of the screen member Q. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 155, when the screen member Q is arranged at the second displacement position and the second screen body Q2 is arranged at the second slide position, the second screen body Q2 The rear end of the screen surface Q2a is close to the screen 4CS.

  When the screen member Q is located at the second displacement position, the sub-control device SS controls the projector mechanism B2 to display an image from the two projection targets of the screen 4CS and the screen member Q. The projection target to be projected is appropriately selected from 0 to 2 ranges, and the selected projection target is irradiated with an image. Specifically, when the screen member Q is disposed at the second displacement position, the sub-control device SS does not irradiate the image to any of the screen 4CS and the screen member Q, A state in which only the screen is illuminated with the image, a state in which the screen member Q is illuminated with the image, and a state in which both the screen 4CS and the screen member Q are illuminated with the image. Is appropriately adopted to control the projector mechanism B2. In the present embodiment, the irradiation range of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 is the same in all the four states. That is, the irradiation light is also irradiated to the projection target that does not project an image. At this time, the projector mechanism B2 irradiates black or the same color as the projection target with respect to the projection target that does not irradiate the video, thereby showing the player that the video is not displayed.

  Further, when the screen member Q is arranged at the first displacement position, the sub-control device SS sets a state in which the screen 4CS is not irradiated with an image and a state in which the screen 4CS is irradiated with an image. The projector mechanism B2 is controlled by appropriately employing one of the two states. Note that, as a modification, even when the screen member Q is arranged at the first displacement position, an image may be irradiated on the screen member Q.

  The sub-control device SS controls the projector mechanism B2 to control an image emitted from the projector mechanism B2. For example, the video content to be projected on the projection target is changed according to the game state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-control device SS controls the driving mechanism T and the projector mechanism B2 to perform an effect in which the image emitted from the projector mechanism B2 and the operation of the screen member Q are synchronized.

  Hereinafter, the sub-control device SS displays, on the display unit 4A, an image having a movement from the near side to the back (in this embodiment, an image in which the “stairs” extend from the near side to the back), and a display of the screen surface of the screen member Q. An effect synchronized with the distraction operation will be described as an example. This effect is performed, for example, when the game state is switched between a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

  First, the sub control device SS controls the drive motor T13 to displace the screen member Q from the first displacement position to the second displacement position. Then, as shown in FIG. 158, only the screen surface Q1a of the screen member Q is irradiated with the image of the “stairs”, and the screen 4CS is irradiated with irradiation light of the same color as the screen. And the projector mechanism B2. Thereafter, the sub-control device SS controls the drive motor T26 to move the second screen body Q2 from the first slide position to the second slide position to extend the screen surface of the screen member Q. At this time, the sub-control device SS controls the projector mechanism B2 such that an image in which the “stairs” extend from the near side to the far side is radiated to the screen to be extended.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 159, immediately after the second screen body Q2 is moved to the second slide position, the position of “7” on the screen 4CS with respect to the position above the intersection with the extension of the screen surface of the screen member Q and the intersection. The projector mechanism B2 is controlled so that the image of "" is emitted.

  As described above, by synchronizing the image radiated from the projector mechanism B2 with the extension operation of the screen surface of the screen member Q, it is possible to execute a powerful effect that cannot be obtained with the image alone. .

  Note that the sub-control device SS may control the driving mechanism T and the projector mechanism B2 to execute an effect in which the image emitted from the projector mechanism B2 and the rotation operation of the screen member Q are synchronized. Further, an effect may be executed in which the image emitted from the projector mechanism B2 and the contraction operation of the screen surface of the screen member Q are synchronized. Even in these cases, it is possible to execute a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only with the video.

(Modification)
Hereinafter, a modified example of the present embodiment will be described.
In the above-described embodiment, the screen mechanism R is housed in the bottom plate 4C1, but is not particularly limited to this, and may be housed in the right plate 4C2, the left plate 4C3, the back plate 4C4, the projector cover B1, and the like. Good. The number of the screen mechanisms R is not limited to one, but may be plural.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screen member Q is made rotatable by the rotation shafts Q5a and Q5b of the screen member Q being supported by the side wall of the opening 4C1a. However, the present invention is not particularly limited to this. Instead, for example, the screen member and the bottom plate 4C1 may be rotatably connected by a hinge mechanism.

  In the above-described embodiment, the free end of the screen member Q is located behind the base end in the second displacement position, but the free end may be located ahead of the base end. That is, when the screen member Q is disposed at the second displacement position, the inclination angle of the screen member Q with respect to the horizontal plane on the screen surface may be larger than 90 degrees. In this case, by extending the screen surface of the screen member Q, it is possible to make the video effect with the movement from the back to the front more powerful. Moreover, when the screen member Q is arranged at the first displacement position, the screen surface of the screen member Q may not be visible from the upper display window UD1. In this case, the driving mechanism T displaces the screen member Q between the first displacement position and the second displacement position, whereby it is possible to control the projection and retraction of the screen member Q.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screen member Q is configured to be positioned and arranged at two positions of the first displacement position and the second displacement position. However, the screen member Q is configured to be capable of being positioned and arranged at three or more displacement positions. You may. In this case, the relative position (the degree of elongation of the screen surface) between the first screen body Q1 and the second screen body Q2 when the screen surface of the screen member Q is extended according to each displacement position is different from each other. May be configured. For example, at a displacement position other than the first displacement position, the degree of elongation of the screen surface is adjusted according to each displacement position such that the distance between the rear end of the second screen body Q2 and the screen 4CS in the front-rear direction is always constant. It may be.

  In addition, the drive mechanism for moving the screen member Q is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be any mechanism that can perform the rotation operation of the screen member Q and the expansion / contraction operation of the screen surface of the screen member Q. I just need. Hereinafter, a modified example of the drive mechanism that moves the screen member Q will be described.

  In the first modification, as shown in FIG. 160, the expansion and contraction operation of the screen surface of the screen member Q is executed by the driving mechanism T3 using the ball screw structure. The drive mechanism T3 includes a nut portion T31, a screw rod T32, and a drive motor T33. The nut portion T31 is attached to the lower surface of the screen plate Q21 of the second screen body Q2. Further, a columnar hole is formed in the nut portion T31, and a female screw is formed on the inner surface thereof. The screw bar T32 is a round bar attached to the first screen body Q1 and extending in the front-rear direction along the screen surface Q1a. The threaded rod T32 has an external thread formed on its outer surface, and is inserted through the hole of the nut portion T31 in such a manner that the threads are screwed together. The screw rod T32 is connected to a drive motor T33, and rotates with the drive of the drive motor T33. The drive motor T33 applies a rotational force to the screw rod T32 under the control of the sub control device SS. By the forward and reverse rotation of the drive motor T33, the nut portion T31 reciprocates along the screw rod T32, and accordingly, the second screen body Q2 slides with respect to the first screen body Q1. As a result, the screen surface of the screen member Q can be expanded and contracted.

  In the second modified example, as shown in FIG. 161, the turning operation of the screen member Q is executed by a driving mechanism T4 employing a link mechanism. In the second modification, the lower end of the opening 4C1a in the bottom plate 4C1 is closed by the support plate 4C1c.

  The drive mechanism T4 is provided as a pair on the left and right sides, and includes a lift T41, a link mechanism T42, and an electric cylinder T43, respectively. The lifting platform T41 of each of the pair of driving mechanisms T4 is in contact with the lower surface of each of the guide plates Q12a and 13a of the right side wall Q13 and the left side wall Q12 of the first screen body Q1.

  In the link mechanism T42, central portions of links T45 and T46 crossing in an X shape are rotatably connected by a pin T47. The rear ends of the links T45 and T46 are rotatably connected to the elevator T41 and the support plate 4C1c by pins T45a and T46a, respectively. Rollers T45b and T46b are rotatably connected to the front ends of the links T45 and T46. As the link mechanism T42 expands and contracts, these rollers T45b and T46b move in the front-rear direction while rolling and contacting the lift table T41 and the support plate 4C1c, respectively.

  The electric cylinder T43 is interposed between the link T45 and the support plate 4C1c. Both ends of the electric cylinder T43 are rotatably connected to the link T45 and the support plate 4C1c. The electric cylinder T43 expands and contracts under the control of the sub control device SS to expand and contract the link mechanism T42. The elevating table T41 moves up and down with the expansion and contraction of the link mechanism T42, so that the screen member Q can be turned around the turning axes Q5a and Q5b.

  In the third modification, as shown in FIG. 162, the rotation operation of the screen member Q and the expansion / contraction operation of the screen surface of the screen member Q are executed by one driving mechanism T5.

  The drive mechanism T5 includes an arm T51 and a drive motor T52. The arm T51 is a linear rod member, and the rear end is fixed to a drive shaft T52a of the drive motor T52. The front end of the arm T51 is rotatably connected to the front end of the screen plate Q21 of the second screen body Q2. Therefore, when the front end of the arm T51 moves in the front-rear direction, the second screen body Q2 moves along the guide path Q15 with the movement of the front end of the arm T51, and expands and contracts the screen surface of the screen member Q. Becomes possible.

  The drive motor T52 is attached to the back wall of the opening 4C1a of the bottom plate 4C1, and the drive shaft T52a is parallel to the left and right directions. When the drive motor T52 is driven in the forward and reverse directions, the arm T51 rotates, and the front end of the arm T51 reciprocates along an arc-shaped locus centered on the drive shaft T52a.

  The drive motor T52 rotates the arm T51 between the first position and the second position about the drive shaft T52a under the control of the sub control device SS. Here, the first position is a position where the screen surface Q1a of the first screen body Q1 in the screen member Q is flush with the upper surface of the bottom plate 4C1.

  The second position is an angle at which the inclination angle of the arm T51 with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than when the arm T51 is arranged at the first position, and is higher than when the front end of the arm T51 is arranged at the first position, and This is the position that is behind. In the second position, the extending direction of the arm T51 is substantially orthogonal to the screen surface of the screen member Q.

  In the above configuration, when the arm T51 is rotated from the first position to the second position, the screen member Q is pressed upward by the front end of the arm T51, so that the screen member Q is centered on the rotation shafts Q5a and Q5b. Rotate upward. Further, at this time, the front end of the arm T51 moves backward, so that the second screen body Q2 moves along the guide path Q15, and the screen surface of the screen member Q is extended.

  On the other hand, when the arm T51 is turned from the second position to the first position, the screen member Q turns downward about the turning axes Q5a and Q5b. Further, at this time, the front end of the arm T51 moves forward, whereby the second screen body Q2 moves along the guide path Q15, and the screen surface of the screen member Q is contracted.

(Summary)
As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is:
(35-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) for projecting an image,
A screen member (screen member Q) having a screen surface to be projected by the projector;
Driving means (driving mechanism T / sub-control device SS) for operating the screen member;
A display window (upper display window UD1) for visually recognizing an image projected on the screen surface of the screen member from outside;
With
The screen member,
A first screen body (first body) supported so as to be displaced between a first displacement position and a second displacement position in which the area of the screen surface as viewed from the display window is larger than the first displacement position. Screen body Q1),
A second screen having the screen surface parallel to the screen surface of the first screen body, and slidably mounted such that the screen surface extends continuously with the screen surface of the first screen body. Screen body (second screen body Q2),
The driving means,
Performing a displacement operation of displacing the first screen body between the first displacement position and the second displacement position, and when the first screen body is at the second displacement position, Performing a distraction operation by sliding the screen surface of the second screen body in a direction continuously extending with the screen surface of the first screen body;
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the invention of (35-1), since the screen member can be moved by the displacement operation, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that is hard to obtain with the video alone and leads to the movement of the screen member. . In addition, the effect can be further enhanced by extending the screen surface of the screen member by the extension operation.

(35-2) The gaming machine according to (35-1),
The drive means (drive mechanism T / sub-control device SS) performs the distraction operation in synchronization with an image emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2);
It is characterized by.

  According to the invention of (35-2), since the distraction operation is synchronized with the video, it is possible to perform a more powerful effect.

(Fifth embodiment)
The gaming machine 501 in the present embodiment is also configured by a rectangular box-shaped housing 2 as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, similarly to the gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment. The housing 2 includes a box-shaped cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism UD disposed on an upper front part of the cabinet G, and a lower door mechanism DD disposed on a lower front part of the cabinet G. have. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so that the upper part and the lower part of the opening in the cabinet G can be closed.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the interior of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space (corresponding to a box-shaped space) and a lower space in the cabinet G by an intermediate support plate 211.

  In the gaming machine 501 of the present embodiment, unlike the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 163, in the upper space in the cabinet G, there is provided a projector mechanism B2 (corresponding to a projector) that emits images forward. A mirror mechanism B3 (corresponding to a reflection mirror) disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 and reflecting an image from the projector mechanism B2 in an obliquely downward direction, and a mirror reflecting the image reflected by the mirror mechanism B3 to the upper display window UD1. It has an accessory MB and a screen SC installed on the back wall 213 of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 (corresponding to a display window).

(Projector mechanism B2)
As shown in FIG. 163, the projector mechanism B2 is disposed at the upper rear of the upper space in the cabinet G. The projector mechanism B2 is provided with a lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown). The lens mechanism B21 is disposed so as to project an image emitted from the light source toward the mirror mechanism B3 in front.

(Mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 163, a mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 (projection direction of the image). As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 includes a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and a mirror stopper for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31, as shown in FIG. B33 and B34. The front surface of the mirror holder B31 is formed in a rectangular plate shape. At each corner of the mirror holder B31, an angle adjustment hole B311 is formed, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface around the angle adjustment hole B311. Mounting holes B314 are formed symmetrically in the vertical direction between the angle adjustment holes B311 in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed at the center and has a size that does not overlap with the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and the mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

  The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed so as to partially overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with both left and right sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted to the mirror holding portion B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344. The optical mirror B32 is held by a mirror holder B31.

(Mirror role MB)
As shown in FIG. 163, the mirror role MB is installed below the projector mechanism B2. The mirror role MB is composed of a mirror part MB1 and a movable part MB2.

  As shown in FIG. 165, the mirror part MB1 has a hemispherical shape, and the planar part MB11 forms a mirror surface capable of reflecting light. On the other hand, the spherical portion MB12 of the mirror portion MB1 has a polyhedral outer peripheral surface, and is capable of reflecting projected light on multiple sides (reflecting light on multiple sides like a mirror ball).

  The movable part MB2 has a function of tilting the mirror part MB1 backward, and a state in which the mirror part MB1 is rotated so that the planar part MB11 faces the front, the spherical part MB12 faces the front, or a spherical part. It has a function of shifting from a state in which the part MB12 faces the front to a state in which the planar part MB11 faces the front.

  The movable part MB2 is a movable mechanism having an outer frame formed of a box MB14 in which an inlet MB321 is formed to secure a movable area when the mirror shaft MB39 supporting the mirror part MB1 tilts backward (see FIG. 165). ).

  Specifically, in the box MB14, the support plate BM33 is arranged apart from the wall of the box MB14. A cylindrical support cylinder MB34 is attached below the support plate MB33 with the tip of the cylinder facing downward, and a cylindrical nut MB35 is rotatably fitted into the cylinder of the support cylinder MB34. The screw hole of the nut MB35 faces in the vertical direction, and a gear MB36 is attached to the lower end surface of the nut MB35 so as to be rotatable integrally with the nut MB35. A motor MB37 is mounted below the support plate MB33, and a drive gear MB38 is mounted on an output shaft of the motor MB37 so as to be rotatable integrally with the output shaft. The drive gear MB38 is meshed with the gear MB36, and when the motor MB37 reciprocates, the gear MB36 and the nut MB35 integrally reciprocate.

  A mirror shaft MB39 is screwed into the nut MB35. The mirror shaft MB39 extends downward from the inlet MB321 through the gear MB36. A mirror part MB1 is attached to a lower end of the mirror shaft MB39. When the motor MB37 rotates reciprocally, the mirror shaft MB39 rotates via the drive gear MB38, the gear MB36, and the nut MB35.

  A support shaft MB42 is rotatably supported on an inner wall MB146 parallel to the side wall MB143 of the box MB14, and a support shaft MB43 is rotatably supported on the side wall MB142 of the box MB14 coaxially with the support shaft MB42. ing. The support cylinder MB34 is supported by the support shafts MB42 and MB43 between the support shaft MB42 and the support shaft MB43.

  One end of the support shaft MB42 penetrates the inner wall MB146 and protrudes toward the side wall MB143, and a gear MB44 is attached to an end of the support shaft MB42. The motor MB45 is attached to the inner side surface of the side wall MB143. The drive gear MB46 attached to the output shaft MB451 of the motor MB45 is meshed with the gear MB44. The rotation of the motor MB45 is transmitted to the support shafts MB42 and MB43 via the drive gear MB46 and the gear MB44, and the support tube MB34 fixed to the support shaft MB42 and the support shaft MB43, and the support plate fixed to the support tube MB34. MB33A, the motor MB37 fixed to the support plate MB33A, and the mirror shaft MB39 rotate integrally about the support shaft MB42 and the support shaft MB43.

  The motors MB45 and MB37 are controlled by the sub control device SS. The sub control device SS controls the rotation of the motors MB45 and MB37 based on the control program.

  For example, the motor MB37 reciprocates according to a control command from the sub-control device SS, and the mirror shaft MB39 rotates (180 °) via the driving gear MB38, the gear MB36, and the nut MB35. Transition from the state in which the spherical portion MB11 faces the front to the state in which the spherical portion MB12 faces the front, or from the state in which the spherical portion MB12 faces the front to the state in which the planar portion MB11 faces the front. (See FIG. 166).

  Further, the motor MB45 is rotated by the control command of the sub-control device SS, and the mirror shaft MB39 is rotated (90 °) about the support shaft MB42 and the support shaft MB43 via the drive gear MB46 and the gear MB44. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 164, the mirror part MB1 can be tilted backward and stored.

(Screen SC)
As shown in FIG. 163, the screen SC is arranged at the innermost part of the upper space, and is fixed to the rear wall G3 by screwing. The screen SC is arranged so that the reflection surface is opposed to the player on the front side, and reflects the reflected light from the mirror mechanism B3 disposed on the upper front part of the screen SC to the front upper display window UD1. Have been.

  The screen SC may be a diffusion type having a white or light gray surface, a reflection type having a resin applied on the surface, or a regression type having an optical lens glass ball applied to the surface. Further, the configuration may be such that the diffusion type, the reflection type, and the regression type screen SC can be switched.

(Upper display window UD1)
The upper display window UD1 is configured by a glass panel that transmits light. The upper display window UD1 may be a translucent transmissive film on a glass surface or an acrylic surface as long as the image projected on the screen SC can be viewed and the image reflected on the mirror object MB can be projected. It may be configured to be attached.

(Direction operation using mirror role MB)
For example, the gaming machine 501 indirectly assists in establishing a combination of symbols (pictures arranged on the outer periphery of the reels RL, RC, and RR) to which a bonus (payout) is to be awarded as a result of the game, thereby giving the player an advantage. A description will be given of an effect when an AT (assist time) is won and a game with 30 ATs is added. That is, the effect that is activated based on the lottery result will be described.

(Direction example 1)
As shown in FIG. 167, the image EI1 (the image of “+30” in this embodiment) emitted from the vicinity of the center of the lens mechanism B21 of the projector mechanism B2 is projected toward the front mirror mechanism B3 and projected. The image EI1 is reflected at the mirror mechanism B3 toward the mirror object MB, and the image EI1 reflected at the mirror mechanism B3 is further directed toward the upper display window UD1 at the planar portion MB11 of the mirror object MB. The image EI1 that is reflected and reflected by the planar portion MB11 is projected onto the upper display window UD1 (see FIG. 168).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167, the images EI2 and EI3 (the shining star-shaped images in this embodiment) emitted from the outer periphery of the lens mechanism B21 of the projector mechanism B2 are projected toward the front mirror mechanism B3. The projected images EI2 and EI3 are reflected by the mirror mechanism B3 toward the screen SC, and the images EI2 and EI3 reflected by the mirror mechanism B3 are projected on the screen SC (see FIG. 168).

  As described above, when the player views the upper display window UD1 from the front, as shown in FIG. 169, the image EI1 (the image of “+30”) projected on the upper display window UD1 and the screen SC arranged at the back are displayed. Can be seen together with the images EI2 and EI3 (shining star-shaped images) projected on the screen. Thereby, it is possible to produce an image that is three-dimensional (feeling of depth) and realistic.

(Direction example 2)
First, as shown in FIG. 164, with the mirror part MB1 tilted rearward and stored, the effect image of "+30" is projected from the projector mechanism B2 onto the rear screen SC, as shown in FIG. . After a lapse of a predetermined time, the mirror unit MB1 is tilted and moved between the mirror mechanism B3 and the screen SC, and the effect image of “+30” is reflected on the planar portion MB11 of the mirror role MB, and the upper display window is displayed. Project on UD1. This makes it possible to perform an effect with a sense of realism such that the effect image of “+30” projected on the screen SC on the back side approaches the upper display window UD1 on the near side.

(Direction example 3)
First, in a state where the mirror unit MB1 is tilted and moved between the mirror mechanism B3 and the screen SC, the motor MB37 is rotated by the control command of the sub-control device SS, and the mirror shaft MB39 is rotated (180 °). By this, the state where the planar portion MB11 of the mirror portion MB1 faces the front is shifted to the state where the spherical portion MB12 faces the front. Then, in the gaming machine 501, the projector mechanism B2 projects the polychromatic light to the spherical portion MB12 via the mirror mechanism B3 according to the result of the game. Thereby, the polychromatic light is irregularly reflected by the polyhedron-shaped portion of the spherical portion MB12, and a light effect like a mirror ball is possible.

(Direction example 4)
When the screen SC is made black, first, as shown in FIG. 164, the mirror mechanism MB1 is tilted rearward as shown in FIG. Is projected on the screen SC on the back side. At this time, since the screen SC is also black, the screen SC is assimilated, and the screen SC can be set to a state where the image of “+30” cannot be seen. After a lapse of a predetermined time, the mirror unit MB1 is tilted and moved between the mirror mechanism B3 and the screen SC, and the effect image of “+30” is reflected on the planar portion MB11 of the mirror role MB, and the upper display window is displayed. Project on UD1. Thus, the projection on the upper display window UD1 can be switched by moving the mirror object MB.

According to the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 163, the mirror portion MB1 of the mirror object MB is arranged between the mirror mechanism B3 and the screen SC so as to be able to reflect an image from the projector mechanism B2. In this case, a part of the image projected via the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 is reflected on the planar portion MB11 of the mirror role MB, and becomes visible through the upper display window UD1. Further, of the images projected via the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, the remaining images not reflected by the mirror object MB are projected on the screen SC, so that they can be visually recognized through the upper display window UD1. .
Thereby, in the gaming machine 501 including the cabinet G (housing 2) having a box-shaped space, the image projected on the upper display window UD1 arranged on the front (the image of “+30”) and the image projected on the back side By displaying an image combined with the image (shining star-shaped image) projected on the arranged screen SC, it is possible to produce a three-dimensional (depth-like) and realistic image (FIG. 169).
When the mirror part MB1 of the mirror role MB is tilted and the image reflected from the mirror mechanism B3 is arranged at a position where it cannot be reflected on the upper display window UD1 (see FIG. 164), the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism The image projected via B3 is projected only on the screen SC. Thereby, it is also possible to produce an effect using only the image projected on the screen SC.

  In addition, a mirror mechanism B3 is provided in front of the projector mechanism B2 so that the image projected from the projector mechanism B2 can be reflected on the mirror object MB. According to this, the projection direction and the projection distance of the image from the projector mechanism B2 can be freely changed by sequentially reflecting the image projected from the projector mechanism B2 via the mirror mechanism B3 and the mirror role MB. Can be. That is, the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement position of the projector mechanism B2 is improved.

  When the planar portion MB11 of the mirror role MB faces the front side, a part of the image projected from the projector mechanism B2 is reflected by the planar portion MB11 of the mirror role MB and displayed on the upper side. The image can be directly projected on the window UD1. On the other hand, when the spherical portion MB12 of the mirror role MB faces the front side, a part of the image projected from the projector mechanism B2 is irregularly reflected by the spherical portion MB12 of the mirror role MB, such as a mirror ball. A light effect is also possible.

(Other embodiments)
In the above embodiment, the image projected from the projector mechanism B2 is configured to be reflected on the mirror mechanism B3 and the mirror object MB and projected on the upper display window UD1, but the present invention is not limited to this. As described above, the projector mechanism B2 may be arranged in front of the cabinet G, and the image projected from the projector mechanism B2 may be reflected by the mirror role MB and projected on the upper display window UD1. In this case, an image emitted from the projector mechanism B2 is directly projected on the screen SC (see FIG. 171).

  Further, the upper display window UD1 may be a dimmable display device whose transmittance can be adjusted. In this case, by changing the transmittance of the upper display window UD1, the image is reflected on the mirror object MB and projected on the upper display window UD1, and projected on the screen SC which is visible through the upper display window UD1. You can change the brightness of the image.

  Further, the mirror role MB may be a half mirror that reflects a part of the projected image and transmits a part of the projected image. In this case, a part of the projected image is reflected by the mirror role MB and is projected on the upper display window UD1. Further, a part of the projected image passes through the mirror role MB and is projected on the screen SC. This allows the gaming machine to display an image obtained by combining the image projected on the upper display window UD1 arranged on the front side with the image projected on the screen SC arranged on the back side, thereby providing a three-dimensional (depth) image. Feeling) and an image with a sense of reality can be produced.

(Modification)
The configuration may be such that the roll screen descends to the upper display window UD1. In this case, the image from the projector mechanism B2 can be reflected on the mirror mechanism B3 and the mirror role MB to display the image through the roll screen. Thus, for example, the video projected on the roll screen can be made monochrome to produce a video effect such as a shadow picture.

  When the roll screen is of a transmission type in which an image is projected from the back side of the roll screen and viewed from the front side, the setting can be changed to a reflection type by raising the roll screen. You may do so.

  Further, a black frame band region may be provided in the planar portion MB11 of the mirror object MB. In this case, the boundary between the projection on the upper display window UD1 and the projection on the screen SC can be clearly displayed.

  Further, if the frame band area of the planar portion MB11 of the mirror role MB is made the same color (for example, gray) as the color of the screen SC, the image projected on the upper display window UD1 and the image projected on the screen SC are displayed. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect in which video characters and the like displayed when the mirror role MB moves between the mirror mechanism B3 and the screen SC are suddenly enlarged.

  When the mirror role MB moves between the mirror mechanism B3 and the screen SC, the display space inside the cabinet G that can be visually recognized through the upper display window UD1 is temporarily set to a black state or a white type. Irradiation of one-color light such as a flash is performed to instantaneously create a state in which the image is invisible, thereby reducing the sense of discomfort when the mirror role MB moves between the mirror mechanism B3 and the screen SC. can do.

  In addition, the upper display window UD1 uses a parallax barrier type display that uses the difference in the appearance of the left and right eyes of a human (parallax) to show different images to both eyes and enables stereoscopic viewing with the naked eye. May be adopted.

  In addition, an object to be a subject of an image by projection mapping is arranged in the upper space of the cabinet G, and an image obtained by combining the effect by the projection mapping, the image reflected on the mirror object MB, and the image projected on the screen SC. Directing is of course also possible.

(Summary)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there have been proposed game machines that project an effect image of a game using a projector on a screen. For example, in a game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H06-035066, projection light from a projector disposed in the game machine is reflected by a reflecting mirror, and the reflected projection light is guided to the back side of the screen. Is described. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-089813 describes a gaming machine in which a game effect image is projected on a screen using a projector.

  However, if an image is simply projected on the screen, a two-dimensional image effect cannot be produced, and there is a case where it is unsatisfactory in terms of a sense of reality.

  By the way, in recent years, a technique called projection mapping for projecting an image not only on a screen but also on an object or a space has attracted attention as an image projection technique. In this technique, an image having a sense of reality is projected by performing a three-dimensional image effect.

  In view of the above, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and provides a gaming machine that can produce a three-dimensional (depth) and realistic image using a projector. The purpose is to provide.

One of the present invention is a gaming machine 501 including a housing 2 having a box-shaped upper space,
In the box-shaped upper space of the housing 2,
A projector mechanism B2,
An upper display window UD1 having transparency disposed on the front side;
A screen SC arranged on the back side,
A mirror role MB for reflecting a part of the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 to the upper display window UD1,
Is placed,
The mirror role MB is configured to be movable to a position where the image EI1 can be reflected on the near side of the screen SC (see FIG. 163) and a position where the image EI1 cannot be reflected (see FIG. 164). Features.

According to the above configuration, when the mirror role MB moves and is disposed on the front side of the screen SC, which can reflect the image EI1 from the projector mechanism B2, a part of the image projected from the projector mechanism B2 (image EI1) is reflected by the mirror object MB and becomes visible through the upper display window UD1. Further, of the images projected from the projector mechanism B2, the remaining images EI2 and EI3 that are not reflected by the mirror object MB are projected on the screen SC, and thus can be visually recognized through the upper display window UD1.
Thereby, in the gaming machine 501 including the housing 2 having a box-shaped upper space, the image EI1 projected on the upper display window UD1 arranged on the front and the image SC projected on the screen SC arranged on the back side. By showing an image combining the images EI2 and EI3, it is possible to produce a three-dimensional (depth-like) and realistic image EI (see FIGS. 168 and 169).
When the mirror role MB moves and the image EI1 projected from the projector mechanism B2 is arranged at a position where it cannot be reflected on the upper display window UD1, the image projected from the projector mechanism B2 is only on the screen SC. Projected. Thereby, it is also possible to produce an effect using only the image projected on the screen SC.

  In addition, one of the present invention includes, in the gaming machine 501, a mirror mechanism B3 disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 so that an image projected from the projector mechanism B2 can be reflected on the mirror role MB. It is characterized by that.

  According to the above configuration, by projecting the image projected from the projector mechanism B2 in order through the mirror mechanism B3 and the mirror role MB, the projection direction of the image from the projector mechanism B2 can be freely changed. . That is, the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement position of the projector mechanism B2 is improved.

Another aspect of the present invention is that in the gaming machine 501, the mirror object MB is rotatable and has a hemispherical shape.
The planar portion MB11 forms a one-sided mirror surface, and the spherical portion MB12 forms a mirror ball having a polyhedral reflecting surface.

  According to the above configuration, when the planar portion MB11 of the mirror role MB faces the front side, a part of the image projected from the projector mechanism B2 is reflected by the planar portion MB11 of the mirror role MB. However, the image can be directly projected on the upper display window UD1. On the other hand, when the spherical portion MB12 of the mirror role MB faces the front side, a part of the image projected from the projector mechanism B2 is irregularly reflected by the polyhedral shape portion of the mirror role MB, such as a mirror ball. A light effect is also possible.

  Also, in the first to fifth embodiments described above, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described, but the present invention is applied to other gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like). It is also possible.

  As described above, the first to fifth embodiments of the present invention have been described, but they are merely specific examples, and do not particularly limit the present invention. The specific configuration of each means and the like can be appropriately changed in design. is there. In addition, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely enumerate the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. is not.

  In the above detailed description, characteristic portions have been mainly described so that the present invention can be more easily understood. The present invention is not limited to the embodiment described in the above detailed description, but can be applied to other embodiments, and the applicable range is various. Further, the terms and wording used in the present specification are used for accurately describing the present invention, and are not used for limiting the interpretation of the present invention. In addition, those skilled in the art will easily be able to infer other configurations, systems, methods, and the like included in the concept of the present invention from the concept of the invention described in this specification. Therefore, the description of the claims should be regarded as including equivalent configurations without departing from the scope of the technical idea of the present invention. In addition, the purpose of the abstract is to simplify the technical contents and essence of the present application by the Patent Office and general public organizations, or by engineers in the technical field who are not familiar with patents, legal terms or technical terms. The purpose of this is to make it possible to make a quick decision with a simple survey. Accordingly, the abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention, which should be evaluated by the appended claims. In addition, in order to fully understand the purpose of the present invention and the specific effects of the present invention, it is desirable that the interpretation should be made with sufficient consideration given to already disclosed documents and the like.

  The above detailed description includes the processing executed by the computer. The above description and expressions are provided for the purpose of allowing a person skilled in the art to understand most efficiently. In this specification, each process used to derive one result should be understood as a process without self-contradiction. In each process, transmission and reception, recording, and the like of electrical or magnetic signals are performed. In the processing in each processing, such a signal is represented by a bit, a value, a symbol, a character, a term, a number, or the like, but it is noted that these are used merely for convenience of explanation. There is a need. Further, the processing in each processing may be described in a common expression with human behavior, but the processing described in this specification is basically executed by various devices. Further, other configurations required for performing each process are obvious from the above description.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game machine 2N Screen device 2N5 Drive device 2N2 2nd movable base material 3A Display unit 3C3a Housing recess B2 Projector mechanism SS Sub-controller R12 2nd three-dimensional member

Claims (2)

A gaming machine having a display unit for displaying video,
The display unit includes:
A projector for illuminating the image,
A screen device to be projected by the projector, the projector, and control means for controlling the screen device;
With
The screen device,
A substrate,
An end portion is fixed to the base material, and a three-dimensional member that can be three-dimensionally deployed,
A drive mechanism for moving the base material between a first position and a second position,
With
The three-dimensional member,
When the base material is arranged at the first position, the base material is housed in a folded state,
When the substrate is disposed in the second position is sterically development, Ri Do a deployed state in which the irradiation light can be irradiated from the projector,
The base material includes a first base material to which one end of the three-dimensional member is fixed, and a second base material to which the other end of the three-dimensional member is fixed,
The drive mechanism is capable of independently moving the first base material and the second base material,
A gaming machine characterized by that: Comprising a housing portion capable of housing the base material arranged at the first position,
In the housing state, the three-dimensional member is folded and housed between the base material and the housing unit,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein:

Images